Import latest fixes to libiberty from GCC.
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
2571583a 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
49fa1e15 24@set H8300
0285c67d 25@set HPPA
0285c67d 26@set I960
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
78058a5e 33@set NIOSII
2a60a7a8
AM
34@set POWERPC
35@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15 36@set Renesas
b4cbbe8f 37@set S/390
49fa1e15
AM
38@set SPU
39@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 40@set WIN32
e0001a05 41@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
42@end ifset
43@c man end
44
9160ea82
AM
45@ifnottex
46@dircategory Software development
47@direntry
252b5132 48* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
49@end direntry
50@end ifnottex
252b5132 51
0e9517a9 52@copying
e49e529d
JM
53This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
54@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
55@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
56@end ifset
57version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 58
2571583a 59Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 60
cf055d54 61Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 62under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
63or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
64with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
65Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 66section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 67@end copying
252b5132
RH
68@iftex
69@finalout
70@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 71@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 72@titlepage
71ba23f6 73@title The GNU linker
252b5132 74@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
75@subtitle @code{ld}
76@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
77@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
78@end ifset
252b5132
RH
79@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
80@author Steve Chamberlain
81@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
82@page
83
84@tex
85{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
86\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
87\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 88\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
89\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
90}
91\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
92@end tex
93
94@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 95@c man begin COPYRIGHT
2571583a 96Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 97
0285c67d 98Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 99under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
100or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 103section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 104@c man end
252b5132 105
252b5132
RH
106@end titlepage
107@end iftex
4ecceb71 108@contents
252b5132
RH
109@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
110
84ec0e6d 111@ifnottex
252b5132 112@node Top
71ba23f6 113@top LD
e49e529d
JM
114This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
117@end ifset
118version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 119
cf055d54 120This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
121Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
122in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 123
252b5132
RH
124@menu
125* Overview:: Overview
126* Invocation:: Invocation
127* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
128@ifset GENERIC
129* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
130@end ifset
131@ifclear GENERIC
132@ifset H8300
133* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
134@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
135@ifset Renesas
136* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
137@end ifset
138@ifset I960
139* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
140@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
141@ifset ARM
142* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
143@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
144@ifset M68HC11
145* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
146@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
147@ifset HPPA
148* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
149@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
150@ifset M68K
151* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
152@end ifset
833794fc
MR
153@ifset MIPS
154* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
155@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
156@ifset POWERPC
157* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
158@end ifset
159@ifset POWERPC64
160* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
161@end ifset
b4cbbe8f
AK
162@ifset S/390
163* S/390 ELF:: ld and S/390 ELF Support
164@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
165@ifset SPU
166* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
167@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
168@ifset TICOFF
169* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
170@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
171@ifset WIN32
172* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
173@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
174@ifset XTENSA
175* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
176@end ifset
252b5132
RH
177@end ifclear
178@ifclear SingleFormat
179* BFD:: BFD
180@end ifclear
181@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
182
183* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
184* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 185* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 186* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 187@end menu
84ec0e6d 188@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
189
190@node Overview
191@chapter Overview
192
193@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
194@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 195
0879a67a 196@ifset man
0285c67d 197@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 198ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
199@c man end
200
201@c man begin SEEALSO
202ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
203the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
204@file{ld}.
205@c man end
206@end ifset
207
208@c man begin DESCRIPTION
209
ff5dcc92 210@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 211their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 212compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 213
ff5dcc92 214@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
215a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
216to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
217
0285c67d
NC
218@ifset man
219@c For the man only
ece2d90e 220This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
221@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
222language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
223@end ifset
224
252b5132 225@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
226This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
227to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
228write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
229@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
230available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
231@end ifclear
232
233Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
234linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
235execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 236@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
237(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
238
0285c67d
NC
239@c man end
240
252b5132
RH
241@node Invocation
242@chapter Invocation
243
0285c67d
NC
244@c man begin DESCRIPTION
245
ff5dcc92 246The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
247and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
248you have many choices to control its behavior.
249
0285c67d
NC
250@c man end
251
252b5132
RH
252@ifset UsesEnvVars
253@menu
254* Options:: Command Line Options
255* Environment:: Environment Variables
256@end menu
257
258@node Options
259@section Command Line Options
260@end ifset
261
262@cindex command line
263@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
264
265@c man begin OPTIONS
266
252b5132
RH
267The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
268practice few of them are used in any particular context.
269@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 270For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
271object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
272link a file @code{hello.o}:
273
274@smallexample
275ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
276@end smallexample
277
ff5dcc92 278This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
279result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
280the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
281directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
282
ff5dcc92 283Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
284point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
285as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
286which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
287files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
288different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
289occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
290option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
291noted in the descriptions below.
292
293@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
294Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
295together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
296options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
297an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
298
299Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
300specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
301and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
302are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
303message @samp{No input files}.
304
36f63dca 305If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
306assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
307augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
308linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
309permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
310or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
311@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
312script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
313extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
314to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
315the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
316
317For options whose names are a single letter,
318option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
319whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
320option that requires them.
321
322For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 323precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 324@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 325this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 326only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
327@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
328name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
329output.
330
331Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
332option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
333immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
334@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
335Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
336accepted.
252b5132 337
36f63dca
NC
338Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
339(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
340prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
341compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
342
343@smallexample
2509a395 344 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
345@end smallexample
346
347This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
348silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
349may also arise when passing options that require values through a
350driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
351a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
352and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
353the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
354
355@smallexample
356 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
357@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
358
359Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
360linker:
361
ff5dcc92 362@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 363@include at-file.texi
dff70155 364
2509a395
SL
365@kindex -a @var{keyword}
366@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
367This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
368argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
369@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
370@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
371to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
372
7ee314fa
AM
373@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
374@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
375Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
376@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
377specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
378will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
379finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 380it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 381This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 382interface.
7ee314fa 383
252b5132
RH
384@ifset I960
385@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
386@kindex -A @var{arch}
387@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
388@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
389@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
390In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
391Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
392@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
393the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 394archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
395family}, for details.
396
ff5dcc92 397Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
398other architecture families.
399@end ifset
400
401@ifclear SingleFormat
402@cindex binary input format
403@kindex -b @var{format}
404@kindex --format=@var{format}
405@cindex input format
406@cindex input format
407@item -b @var{input-format}
408@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
409@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
410file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 411@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 412that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 413configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 414to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
415default input format the most usual format on each machine.
416@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
417supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
418formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
419@xref{BFD}.
420
421You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
422binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
423linking object files of different formats), by including
424@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 425particular format.
252b5132
RH
426
427The default format is taken from the environment variable
428@code{GNUTARGET}.
429@ifset UsesEnvVars
430@xref{Environment}.
431@end ifset
432You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
433@code{TARGET};
434@ifclear man
435see @ref{Format Commands}.
436@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
437@end ifclear
438
439@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
440@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
441@cindex compatibility, MRI
442@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
443@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 444For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 445files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
446@ifclear man
447@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
448@end ifclear
449@ifset man
450the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
451@end ifset
452Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 453the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
454scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
455If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
456specified by any @samp{-L} options.
457
458@cindex common allocation
459@kindex -d
460@kindex -dc
461@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 462@item -d
252b5132
RH
463@itemx -dc
464@itemx -dp
465These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
466compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
467even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
468script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
469@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
470
7ee314fa
AM
471@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
472@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
473@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
474@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
475Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
476@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
477specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
478will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
479option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 480The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 481
252b5132
RH
482@cindex entry point, from command line
483@kindex -e @var{entry}
484@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 485@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
486@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
487Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
488program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
489named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
490and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
491base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
492@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
493and other ways of specifying the entry point.
494
b58f81ae
DJ
495@kindex --exclude-libs
496@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
497Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 498exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
499@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
500automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
501port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
502explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
503option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
504be treated as hidden.
505
e1c37eb5
DK
506@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
507@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
508Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
509should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
510into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
511may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
512used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
513the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
514match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
515command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
516of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
517regardless of this option.
518
252b5132
RH
519@cindex dynamic symbol table
520@kindex -E
521@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 522@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
523@item -E
524@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
525@itemx --no-export-dynamic
526When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
527option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
528all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
529set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
530
531If you do not use either of these options (or use the
532@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
533dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
534referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
535
536If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
537back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
538dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
539linking the program itself.
540
55255dae 541You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 542be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 543See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 544
8b747e1a
DK
545Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
546support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
547the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
548
36f63dca 549@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
550@cindex big-endian objects
551@cindex endianness
552@kindex -EB
553@item -EB
554Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
555
556@cindex little-endian objects
557@kindex -EL
558@item -EL
559Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 560@end ifclear
252b5132 561
2509a395
SL
562@kindex -f @var{name}
563@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
564@item -f @var{name}
565@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
566When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
567to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
568table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
569symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
570
571If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
572run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
573the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
574first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
575@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
576in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
577Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
578implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
579machine specific performance.
580
581This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
582will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
583
2509a395
SL
584@kindex -F @var{name}
585@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 586@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 587@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
588When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
589the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
590of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
591on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
592
593If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
594run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
595dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
596filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
597found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
598used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
599@var{name}.
600
ff5dcc92 601Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 602toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
603object files.
604@ifclear SingleFormat
605The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 606@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 607@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
608environment variable.
609@end ifclear
610The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
611creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 612
3dbf70a2 613@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
614@kindex -fini=@var{name}
615@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
616When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
617executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
618address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
619the function to call.
620
252b5132
RH
621@kindex -g
622@item -g
623Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
624
2509a395
SL
625@kindex -G @var{value}
626@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 627@cindex object size
2509a395 628@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
629@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
630Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
631@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 632MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
633sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
634
635@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 636@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 637@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 638@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
639@itemx -soname=@var{name}
640When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
641the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
642which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
643linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
644field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
645
646@kindex -i
647@cindex incremental link
648@item -i
649Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
650
3dbf70a2 651@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
652@kindex -init=@var{name}
653@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
654When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
655executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
656of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
657function to call.
658
252b5132 659@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 660@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 661@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 662@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
663@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
664Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
665list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
666If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 667will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 668will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 669
ff5dcc92 670On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
671files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
672and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
673called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
674@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
675indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
676to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
677@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
678
679The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
680specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
681was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
682command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
683archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
684the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
685
ff5dcc92 686See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
687archives multiple times.
688
689You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
690
691@ifset GENERIC
692This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 693if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
694behaviour of the AIX linker.
695@end ifset
696
697@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 698@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 699@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 700@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 701@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
702Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
703for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
704option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
705in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
706on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 707@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
708order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
709how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
710option is specified.
252b5132 711
3aa2d05a
NC
712If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=} or @code{$SYSROOT}, then this
713prefix will be replaced by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the
714@samp{--sysroot} option, or specified when the linker is configured.
9c8ebd6a 715
252b5132
RH
716@ifset UsesEnvVars
717The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 718@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
719some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
720@end ifset
721
722The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
723@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
724at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
725
726@cindex emulation
727@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 728@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
729Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
730emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
731
732If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
733@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
734
735Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
736configured.
737
738@cindex link map
739@kindex -M
740@kindex --print-map
741@item -M
742@itemx --print-map
743Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
744information about the link, including the following:
745
746@itemize @bullet
747@item
3b83e13a 748Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
749@item
750How common symbols are allocated.
751@item
752All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
753which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
754@item
755The values assigned to symbols.
756
757Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
758involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
759have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
760linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
761of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
762the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
763linker script containing:
764
765@smallexample
766 foo = 1
767 foo = foo * 4
768 foo = foo + 8
769@end smallexample
770
771will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
772option is used:
773
774@smallexample
775 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
776 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
777 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
778@end smallexample
779
780See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
781scripts.
252b5132
RH
782@end itemize
783
784@kindex -n
785@cindex read-only text
786@cindex NMAGIC
787@kindex --nmagic
788@item -n
789@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
790Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
791libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
792mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
793
794@kindex -N
795@kindex --omagic
796@cindex read/write from cmd line
797@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 798@item -N
252b5132
RH
799@itemx --omagic
800Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
801not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
802libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
803mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
804is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
805specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
806
807@kindex --no-omagic
808@cindex OMAGIC
809@item --no-omagic
810This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
811sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
812be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
813shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
814
815@kindex -o @var{output}
816@kindex --output=@var{output}
817@cindex naming the output file
818@item -o @var{output}
819@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 820Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
821option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
822script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
823
824@kindex -O @var{level}
825@cindex generating optimized output
826@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 827If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 828the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
829should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
830option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
831the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
832no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
833of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 834
387dd777
DP
835@kindex -plugin @var{name}
836@item -plugin @var{name}
837Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
838the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
839automatically added by the complier, when using link time
840optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
841wish.
842
843Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
844from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
845@command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
846those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
847copied into the @file{$@{libdir@}/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
848based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
849just copy in the newest one.
850
26278bb8
UD
851@kindex --push-state
852@cindex push state governing input file handling
853@item --push-state
854The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
855flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
856restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
857
858The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
859@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
860@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
861@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
862@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
863@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
864
865One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
866used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
867listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
868something as follows:
869
870@smallexample
871-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
872@end smallexample
873
874@kindex --pop-state
875@cindex pop state governing input file handling
67cecaba 876@item --pop-state
26278bb8
UD
877Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
878flags governing input file handling.
879
a712da20
NC
880@kindex -q
881@kindex --emit-relocs
882@cindex retain relocations in final executable
883@item -q
884@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 885Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
886Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
887order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
888in larger executables.
889
dbab7a7b
NC
890This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
891
4f471f39
RS
892@kindex --force-dynamic
893@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
894@item --force-dynamic
895Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
896to VxWorks targets.
897
252b5132
RH
898@cindex partial link
899@cindex relocatable output
900@kindex -r
1049f94e 901@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 902@item -r
1049f94e 903@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 904Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 905turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
906linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
907magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
908@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 909@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
910If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
911linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
912constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
913
62bf86b4
HPN
914When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
915partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
916relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
917example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
918with input files in other formats at all.
919
252b5132
RH
920This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
921
922@kindex -R @var{file}
923@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
924@cindex symbol-only input
925@item -R @var{filename}
926@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
927Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
928relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
929to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
930programs. You may use this option more than once.
931
ff5dcc92 932For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 933followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 934the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
935
936@kindex -s
937@kindex --strip-all
938@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 939@item -s
252b5132
RH
940@itemx --strip-all
941Omit all symbol information from the output file.
942
943@kindex -S
944@kindex --strip-debug
945@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 946@item -S
252b5132
RH
947@itemx --strip-debug
948Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
949
a70f34c0
NC
950@kindex --strip-discarded
951@kindex --no-strip-discarded
952@item --strip-discarded
953@itemx --no-strip-discarded
954Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
955Enabled by default.
956
252b5132
RH
957@kindex -t
958@kindex --trace
959@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 960@item -t
252b5132 961@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 962Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
963
964@kindex -T @var{script}
965@kindex --script=@var{script}
966@cindex script files
967@item -T @var{scriptfile}
968@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
969Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 970@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 971@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
972output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
973the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
974specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
975options accumulate.
252b5132 976
14be8564
L
977@kindex -dT @var{script}
978@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
979@cindex script files
980@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
981@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
982Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
983
984This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
985processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
986command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
987@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
988behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
989command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
990the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
991@samp{gcc}).
992
252b5132
RH
993@kindex -u @var{symbol}
994@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
995@cindex undefined symbol
996@item -u @var{symbol}
997@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
998Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
999symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
1000modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
1001different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
1002option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
1003
0a618243
AB
1004If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
1005into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
1006undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
1007instead.
1008
1009@kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1010@cindex symbols, require defined
1011@cindex defined symbol
1012@item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1013Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
1014is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
1015is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
1016and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
1017@code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
1018can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
1019
252b5132
RH
1020@kindex -Ur
1021@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 1022@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
1023For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1024@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 1025turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
1026@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1027It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1028with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1029be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1030@samp{-r} for the others.
1031
c005eb9e
AB
1032@kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1033@cindex orphan sections
1034@cindex sections, orphan
1035@item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1036Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1037specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1038
1039@var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1040
1041@table @code
1042@item place
1043Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1044the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
d2732b69 1045@samp{--unique} also affects how sections are placed.
c005eb9e
AB
1046
1047@item discard
1048All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1049@samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1050
1051@item warn
1052The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1053issue a warning.
1054
1055@item error
1056The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1057@end table
1058
1059The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1060
577a0623
AM
1061@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1062@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1063Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1064@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1065missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1066specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1067multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1068input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1069in a linker script.
a854a4a7 1070
252b5132
RH
1071@kindex -v
1072@kindex -V
1073@kindex --version
1074@cindex version
1075@item -v
1076@itemx --version
1077@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 1078Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
1079lists the supported emulations.
1080
1081@kindex -x
1082@kindex --discard-all
1083@cindex deleting local symbols
1084@item -x
1085@itemx --discard-all
1086Delete all local symbols.
1087
1088@kindex -X
1089@kindex --discard-locals
1090@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 1091@item -X
252b5132 1092@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
1093Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1094system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1095or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
1096
1097@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1098@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1099@cindex symbol tracing
1100@item -y @var{symbol}
1101@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1102Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1103option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1104to prepend an underscore.
1105
1106This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1107don't know where the reference is coming from.
1108
1109@kindex -Y @var{path}
1110@item -Y @var{path}
1111Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1112for Solaris compatibility.
1113
1114@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1115@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1116The recognized keywords are:
1117@table @samp
1118
1119@item combreloc
1120Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1121lookup caching possible.
1122
b8871f35
L
1123@item common
1124Generate common symbols with the STT_COMMON type druing a relocatable
1125link.
1126
cd6d6c15 1127@item defs
560e09e9 1128Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1129shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1130
6aa29e7b
JJ
1131@item execstack
1132Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1133
b039ef04
L
1134@item global
1135This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1136the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1137of subsequently loaded libraries.
1138
93ab9c0d
NC
1139@item globalaudit
1140This option is only meaningful when building a dynamic executable.
1141This option marks the executable as requiring global auditing by
1142setting the @code{DF_1_GLOBAUDIT} bit in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} dynamic
1143tag. Global auditing requires that any auditing library defined via
1144the @option{--depaudit} or @option{-P} command line options be run for
1145all dynamic objects loaded by the application.
1146
cd6d6c15
NC
1147@item initfirst
1148This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1149It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1150before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1151the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1152the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1153objects.
1154
1155@item interpose
1156Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1157but the primary executable.
1158
5fa222e4
AM
1159@item lazy
1160When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1161dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1162the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1163Lazy binding is the default.
1164
cd6d6c15
NC
1165@item loadfltr
1166Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1167runtime.
1168
1169@item muldefs
1170Allows multiple definitions.
1171
1172@item nocombreloc
1173Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1174
b8871f35
L
1175@item nocommon
1176Generate common symbols with the STT_OBJECT type druing a relocatable
1177link.
1178
cd6d6c15 1179@item nocopyreloc
daf220f0
AM
1180Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1181defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
cd6d6c15
NC
1182
1183@item nodefaultlib
1184Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1185ignore any default library search paths.
1186
1187@item nodelete
1188Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1189
1190@item nodlopen
1191Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1192
1193@item nodump
1194Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1195
6aa29e7b
JJ
1196@item noexecstack
1197Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1198
8dfef1bd
L
1199@item text
1200Treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1201
1202@item notext
1203Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1204
1205@item textoff
1206Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1207
6aa29e7b
JJ
1208@item norelro
1209Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1210
cd6d6c15
NC
1211@item now
1212When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1213dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1214when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1215deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1216first called.
1217
1218@item origin
1219Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1220
6aa29e7b
JJ
1221@item relro
1222Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1223
24718e3b
L
1224@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1225Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1226
1227@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1228Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1229
04c3a755
NS
1230@item stack-size=@var{value}
1231Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1232Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1233@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1234
d258b828
IZ
1235@item bndplt
1236Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1237
889c2a67
L
1238@item noextern-protected-data
1239Don't treat protected data symbol as external when building shared
1240library. This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used
1241to workaround incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1242generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
4dba69b9 1243module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
889c2a67
L
1244i386 and x86-64.
1245
954b63d4
AM
1246@item dynamic-undefined-weak
1247Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
1248if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
1249by symbol visibility or versioning. Not all targets support this
1250option.
1251
aec6b87e 1252@item nodynamic-undefined-weak
954b63d4
AM
1253Do not make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic
1254object. Not all targets support this option. If neither
1255@option{-z nodynamic-undefined-weak} nor @option{-z dynamic-undefined-weak}
1256are given, a target may default to either option being in force, or
1257make some other selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic.
aec6b87e 1258
4c10bbaa
L
1259@item noreloc-overflow
1260Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1261relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1262overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
1263
caa65211 1264@item call-nop=prefix-addr
caa65211
L
1265@itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1266@itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1267@itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1268Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1269to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1270@option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
caa65211
L
1271@option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1272@option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1273@option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1274Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1275
ee2fdd6f
L
1276@item ibtplt
1277Generate Intel Indirect Branch Tracking (IBT) enabled PLT entries.
1278Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1279
1280@item IBT
1281Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT in .note.gnu.property section
1282to indicate compatibility with IBT. This also implies @option{ibtplt}.
1283Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1284
48580982
L
1285@item shstk
1286Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK in .note.gnu.property section
1287to indicate compatibility with Intel Shadow Stack. Supported for
1288Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1289
cd6d6c15
NC
1290@end table
1291
ece2d90e 1292Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1293
1294@kindex -(
1295@cindex groups of archives
1296@item -( @var{archives} -)
1297@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1298The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1299either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1300
1301The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1302references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1303the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1304archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1305object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1306would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1307they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1308resolved.
1309
1310Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1311it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1312more archives.
1313
69da35b5
NC
1314@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1315@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1316@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1317@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1318Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1319recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1320and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1321the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1322behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1323so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1324restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1325
4a43e768
AM
1326@kindex --as-needed
1327@kindex --no-as-needed
1328@item --as-needed
1329@itemx --no-as-needed
1330This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1331on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1332the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1333on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1334needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1335emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1336non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1240be6b
AM
1337the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1338non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
ffa9430d
AM
1339Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1340the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1341needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1342from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1343
e56f61be
L
1344@kindex --add-needed
1345@kindex --no-add-needed
1346@item --add-needed
1347@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1348These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1349their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1350options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1351and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1352
252b5132
RH
1353@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1354@item -assert @var{keyword}
1355This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1356
1357@kindex -Bdynamic
1358@kindex -dy
1359@kindex -call_shared
1360@item -Bdynamic
1361@itemx -dy
1362@itemx -call_shared
1363Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1364for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1365default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1366for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1367multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1368@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1369
a1ab1d2a
UD
1370@kindex -Bgroup
1371@item -Bgroup
1372Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1373section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1374object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1375@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1376only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1377
252b5132
RH
1378@kindex -Bstatic
1379@kindex -dn
1380@kindex -non_shared
1381@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1382@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1383@itemx -dn
1384@itemx -non_shared
1385@itemx -static
1386Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1387platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1388variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1389may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1390library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1391option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1392option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1393shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1394references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1395libraries.
252b5132
RH
1396
1397@kindex -Bsymbolic
1398@item -Bsymbolic
1399When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1400definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1401for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
e20365c5
L
1402within the shared library. This option can also be used with the
1403@option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1404executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1405the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1406support shared libraries and position independent executables.
252b5132 1407
40b36307
L
1408@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1409@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1410When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1411symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
e20365c5
L
1412This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1413when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1414to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
40b36307 1415This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
e20365c5 1416libraries and position independent executables.
40b36307 1417
55255dae
L
1418@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1419@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1420Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1421typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1422global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1423within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1424to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1425in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1426which support shared libraries.
1427
1428The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1429scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1430
40b36307
L
1431@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1432@item --dynamic-list-data
1433Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1434
1435@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1436@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1437Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1438is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1439
0b8a70d9
L
1440@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1441@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1442Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1443
252b5132
RH
1444@kindex --check-sections
1445@kindex --no-check-sections
1446@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1447@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1448Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1449been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1450perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1451suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1452allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1453restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1454Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1455force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1456option.
252b5132 1457
ddbb8a31
NC
1458@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1459@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1460@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1461@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1462This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1463by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1464command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1465output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1466input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1467specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1468follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1469behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1470
1471This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1472libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1473mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1474their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1475required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1476the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1477dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1478symbols.
1479
252b5132
RH
1480@cindex cross reference table
1481@kindex --cref
1482@item --cref
1483Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1484generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1485Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1486
1487The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1488easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1489sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1490symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1491definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1492where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1493symbol are listed.
252b5132 1494
4818e05f
AM
1495@cindex common allocation
1496@kindex --no-define-common
1497@item --no-define-common
1498This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1499The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1500@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1501
1502The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1503the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1504of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1505forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1506Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1507from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1508This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1509and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1510duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1511paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1512
7bdf4127
AB
1513@cindex group allocation in linker script
1514@cindex section groups
1515@cindex COMDAT
1516@kindex --force-group-allocation
1517@item --force-group-allocation
1518This option causes the linker to place section group members like
1519normal input sections, and to delete the section groups. This is the
1520default behaviour for a final link but this option can be used to
1521change the behaviour of a relocatable link (@samp{-r}). The script
1522command @code{FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION} has the same
1523effect. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1524
252b5132 1525@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1526@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1527@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1528Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1529address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1530times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1531limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1532context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1533symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1534constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
66bc8739
AM
1535using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1536@emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1537equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
252b5132
RH
1538
1539@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1540@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1541@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1542@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1543@itemx --no-demangle
1544These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1545and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1546present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1547underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1548mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1549different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1550to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1551demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1552is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1553
1554@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1555@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1556@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1557@item -I@var{file}
1558@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1559Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1560generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1561linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1562doing.
1563
9b8b325a
RF
1564@kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1565@item --no-dynamic-linker
1566When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1567linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1568executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1569entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1570
a70f34c0
NC
1571@kindex --embedded-relocs
1572@item --embedded-relocs
1573This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
1574that the relocs are stored in a target specific section. This option
1575is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1576targets.
1577
7ce691ae 1578@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1579@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1580@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1581@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1582Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1583with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1584
252b5132
RH
1585@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1586@item --force-exe-suffix
1587Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1588
1589If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1590@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1591the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1592option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1593Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1594it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1595
1596@kindex --gc-sections
1597@kindex --no-gc-sections
1598@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1599@item --gc-sections
1600@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1601Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1602targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761 1603performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
0f088b2a
KT
1604@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1605collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1606implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
252b5132 1607
d5465ba2
AM
1608@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1609examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1610symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1611command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1612referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1613libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1614referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1615the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1616relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1617
ac69cbc6 1618This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1619@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1620specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1621a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1622
c17d87de
NC
1623@kindex --print-gc-sections
1624@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1625@cindex garbage collection
1626@item --print-gc-sections
1627@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1628List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1629printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1630collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1631default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1632be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1633line.
1634
22185505 1635@kindex --gc-keep-exported
1636@cindex garbage collection
1637@item --gc-keep-exported
1638When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1639collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1640default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1641executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1642collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1643Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1644it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1645ELF format targets.
1646
30824704
RM
1647@kindex --print-output-format
1648@cindex output format
1649@item --print-output-format
1650Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1651other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1652in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1653
3604cb1f
TG
1654@kindex --print-memory-usage
1655@cindex memory usage
1656@item --print-memory-usage
1657Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1658the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1659quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1660headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1661parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1662
1663@smallexample
1664Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1665 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1666 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1667@end smallexample
1668
252b5132
RH
1669@cindex help
1670@cindex usage
1671@kindex --help
1672@item --help
1673Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1674
ea20a7da
CC
1675@kindex --target-help
1676@item --target-help
1677Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1678
2509a395
SL
1679@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1680@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1681Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1682@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1683
1684@cindex memory usage
1685@kindex --no-keep-memory
1686@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1687@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1688symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1689instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1690necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1691while linking a large executable.
1692
1693@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1694@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1695@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1696@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1697Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1698is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1699The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1700behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1701libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1702
aa713662
L
1703@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1704@kindex -z muldefs
1705@item --allow-multiple-definition
1706@itemx -z muldefs
1707Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1708report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1709first definition will be used.
1710
b79e8c78 1711@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1712@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1713@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1714@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1715Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1716This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1717determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1718shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1719how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1720
903249d7
NC
1721The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1722referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1723an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1724a shared library.
1725
1726The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1727libraries specified at link time are that:
1728
1729@itemize @bullet
1730@item
1731A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1732that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1733resolvable at load time.
1734@item
1735There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1736symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1737
1738The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1739select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1740architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1741appropriate memset function.
1742@end itemize
b79e8c78 1743
31941635
L
1744@kindex --no-undefined-version
1745@item --no-undefined-version
1746Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1747it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1748will be issued instead.
1749
3e3b46e5
PB
1750@kindex --default-symver
1751@item --default-symver
1752Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1753exported symbols.
1754
1755@kindex --default-imported-symver
1756@item --default-imported-symver
1757Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1758imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1759
252b5132
RH
1760@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1761@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1762Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1763files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1764been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1765This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1766errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1767have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1768inappropriate.
1769
fe7929ce
AM
1770@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1771@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1772Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1773library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1774
252b5132
RH
1775@kindex --no-whole-archive
1776@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1777Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1778archive files.
1779
1780@cindex output file after errors
1781@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1782@item --noinhibit-exec
1783Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1784Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1785errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1786when it issues any error whatsoever.
1787
0a9c1c8e
CD
1788@kindex -nostdlib
1789@item -nostdlib
1790Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1791command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1792(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1793
252b5132 1794@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1795@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1796@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1797@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1798file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1799@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1800object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1801object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1802should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1803usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1804name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1805list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1806command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1807this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1808@end ifclear
1809
76359541
TP
1810@kindex --out-implib
1811@item --out-implib @var{file}
1812Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1813the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1814library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1815may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1816behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1817step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1818the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1819
36af4a4e
JJ
1820@kindex -pie
1821@kindex --pic-executable
1822@item -pie
1823@itemx --pic-executable
1824@cindex position independent executables
1825Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1826ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1827libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1828address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1829normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1830defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1831
252b5132
RH
1832@kindex -qmagic
1833@item -qmagic
1834This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1835
1836@kindex -Qy
1837@item -Qy
1838This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1839
1840@kindex --relax
1841@cindex synthesizing linker
1842@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1843@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1844@item --relax
28d5f677 1845@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1846An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1847@ifset GENERIC
1848This option is only supported on a few targets.
1849@end ifset
1850@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1851@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1852@end ifset
1853@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1854@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1855@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1856@ifset XTENSA
1857@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1858@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1859@ifset M68HC11
1860@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1861@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1862@ifset NIOSII
1863@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1864@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1865@ifset POWERPC
1866@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1867@end ifset
252b5132 1868
28d5f677
NC
1869On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1870global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1871addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1872synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1873instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1874
1875On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1876debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1877@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1878This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1879family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1880@end ifset
1881
1882@ifset GENERIC
1883On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1884but ignored.
1885@end ifset
1886
28d5f677
NC
1887On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1888@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1889
252b5132
RH
1890@cindex retaining specified symbols
1891@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1892@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1893@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1894@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1895Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1896discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1897symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1898@ifset GENERIC
1899(such as VxWorks)
1900@end ifset
1901where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1902run-time memory.
1903
1904@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1905or symbols needed for relocations.
1906
1907You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1908line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1909
1910@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1911@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1912@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1913@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1914Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1915linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1916arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1917them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1918also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1919objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1920@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1921ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1922@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1923
ff5dcc92 1924The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
d8506323 1925SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1926@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1927runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1928options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1929gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1930file systems.
252b5132 1931
ff5dcc92 1932For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1933followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1934the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1935@end ifset
1936
1937@ifset GENERIC
1938@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1939@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1940@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1941When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1942happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1943of the input files.
1944
1945When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1946non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1947shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1948explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1949specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1950@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1951either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1952appearing multiple times.
1953
e680a6b6
NC
1954The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
1955directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
1956containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
1957and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
195864-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
1959
1960The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
1961@var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
1962supported.
1963
28c309a2
NC
1964This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1965that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1966is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1967runtime linker would do.
1968
252b5132 1969The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1970libraries:
252b5132
RH
1971@enumerate
1972@item
ff5dcc92 1973Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1974@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1975Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1976between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1977specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1978used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1979at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1980by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1981the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1982@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1983On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1984@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1985environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1986@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1987On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1988directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1989@item
a1b8d843 1990For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 1991variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1992@item
ec4eb78a
L
1993For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1994@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1995libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1996@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1997@item
252b5132
RH
1998The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1999@item
2000For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
2001exists, the list of directories found in that file.
2002@end enumerate
2003
2004If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
2005warning and continue with the link.
2006@end ifset
2007
2008@kindex -shared
2009@kindex -Bshareable
2010@item -shared
2011@itemx -Bshareable
2012@cindex shared libraries
2013Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
2014and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 2015shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
2016undefined symbols in the link.
2017
252b5132 2018@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
2019@item --sort-common
2020@itemx --sort-common=ascending
2021@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
2022This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
2023ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
2024sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
2025eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
2026between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
2027specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 2028
2509a395
SL
2029@kindex --sort-section=name
2030@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
2031This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
2032patterns in the linker script.
2033
2509a395
SL
2034@kindex --sort-section=alignment
2035@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
2036This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
2037patterns in the linker script.
2038
a70f34c0
NC
2039@kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
2040@item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
2041This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
2042.dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2043post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2044
252b5132 2045@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 2046@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 2047Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
2048each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2049size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
2050
2051@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 2052@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 2053Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 2054output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 2055This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
2056certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2057cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2058that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2059support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2060input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2061more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 2062many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
2063
2064@kindex --stats
2065@item --stats
2066Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2067as execution time and memory usage.
2068
2509a395 2069@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
2070@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2071Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2072configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2073that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2074
a70f34c0
NC
2075@kindex --task-link
2076@item --task-link
2077This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2078file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2079
252b5132
RH
2080@kindex --traditional-format
2081@cindex traditional format
2082@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
2083For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2084the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
2085use the traditional format instead.
2086
2087@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 2088For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
2089symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2090full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2091@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 2092trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
2093combine duplicate entries.
2094
2509a395
SL
2095@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2096@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
2097Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2098address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2099times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2100line.
2101@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2102for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2103@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2104should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2105sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2106
2509a395
SL
2107@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2108@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2109@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 2110@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
2111@item -Tbss=@var{org}
2112@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2113@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2114Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 2115@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 2116
2509a395
SL
2117@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2118@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 2119@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
2120When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2121byte of the text segment.
258795f5 2122
9d5777a3
RM
2123@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2124@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2125@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2126When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2127the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2128text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2129
0d705e9f
AM
2130@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2131@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2132@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2133When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2134model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2135
560e09e9
NC
2136@kindex --unresolved-symbols
2137@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2138Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2139values for @samp{method}:
2140
2141@table @samp
2142@item ignore-all
da8bce14 2143Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
2144
2145@item report-all
da8bce14 2146Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
2147
2148@item ignore-in-object-files
2149Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2150ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2151
2152@item ignore-in-shared-libs
2153Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2154ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2155when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2156libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2157command line.
2158@end table
2159
2160The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2161by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2162
2163Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2164unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2165can change this to a warning.
2166
1715a13c
L
2167@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2168@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 2169@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 2170@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 2171Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 2172supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
2173the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2174argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
2175
2176@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2177@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 2178@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
2179Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2180used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 2181about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
2182is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2183see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2184use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2185symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2186@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 2187
7ce691ae 2188@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
2189@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2190@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2191@item --warn-common
2192Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 2193a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
2194but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2195you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 2196Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
2197warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2198
2199There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2200
2201@table @samp
2202@item int i = 1;
2203A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2204file.
2205
2206@item extern int i;
2207An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2208There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2209variable somewhere.
2210
2211@item int i;
2212A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2213variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2214The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2215single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2216size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2217a definition of the same variable.
2218@end table
2219
2220The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2221Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2222just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2223encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2224a common symbol.
2225
2226@enumerate
2227@item
2228Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2229definition for the symbol.
2230@smallexample
2231@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2232 overridden by definition
2233@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2234@end smallexample
2235
2236@item
2237Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2238the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2239except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2240@smallexample
2241@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2242 overriding common
2243@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2244@end smallexample
2245
2246@item
2247Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2248@smallexample
2249@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2250 of `@var{symbol}'
2251@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2252@end smallexample
2253
2254@item
2255Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2256@smallexample
2257@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2258 overridden by larger common
2259@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2260@end smallexample
2261
2262@item
2263Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2264the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2265encountered in a different order.
2266@smallexample
2267@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2268 overriding smaller common
2269@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2270@end smallexample
2271@end enumerate
2272
2273@kindex --warn-constructors
2274@item --warn-constructors
2275Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2276object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2277detect the use of global constructors.
2278
2279@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2280@item --warn-multiple-gp
2281Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2282This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2283Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2284section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2285of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2286base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2287base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2288bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2289large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2290values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2291option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2292
2293@kindex --warn-once
2294@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2295@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2296@item --warn-once
2297Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2298which refers to it.
2299
2300@kindex --warn-section-align
2301@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2302@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2303@item --warn-section-align
2304Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2305alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2306The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2307is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2308the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2309
8fdd7217
NC
2310@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2311@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2312Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2313
a0c402a5
L
2314@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2315@item --warn-alternate-em
2316Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2317
560e09e9
NC
2318@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2319@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2320If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2321@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2322This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2323
2324@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2325@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2326This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2327it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2328
252b5132
RH
2329@kindex --whole-archive
2330@cindex including an entire archive
2331@item --whole-archive
2332For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2333@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2334in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2335files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2336library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2337library. This option may be used more than once.
2338
7ec229ce 2339Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2340about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2341Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2342list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2343your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2344
2509a395
SL
2345@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2346@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2347Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2348@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2349undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2350@var{symbol}.
2351
2352This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2353wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2354wishes to call the system function, it should call
2355@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2356
2357Here is a trivial example:
2358
2359@smallexample
2360void *
cc2f008e 2361__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2362@{
cc2f008e 2363 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2364 return __real_malloc (c);
2365@}
2366@end smallexample
2367
ff5dcc92 2368If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2369all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2370instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2371call the real @code{malloc} function.
2372
2373You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2374links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2375you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2376file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2377call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2378
6aa29e7b 2379@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b 2380@kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
6aa29e7b 2381@item --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b
NC
2382@itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2383Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2384(@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2385section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
6aa29e7b 2386
e41b3a13
JJ
2387@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2388@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2389Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2390generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2391if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2392
6c1439be
L
2393@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2394@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2395@item --enable-new-dtags
2396@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2397This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2398systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2399@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2400and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2401If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2402created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2403those options are only available for ELF systems.
2404
2d643429 2405@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2406@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2407Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2408close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2409time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2410increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2411value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2412
fdc90cb4
JJ
2413@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2414@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2415Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2416@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2417new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2418the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2419hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2420
0ce398f1
L
2421@kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2422@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2423@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2424@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2425@item --compress-debug-sections=none
2426@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2427@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2428@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
9af89fba
NC
2429On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2430compressed using zlib.
2431
2432@option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2433sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2434DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2435instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2436also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2437sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2438
2439The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2440@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2441
2442Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2443sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2444for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2445uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2446
2447The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2448involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2449default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2450@option{--help} option.
0ce398f1 2451
35835446
JR
2452@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2453@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2454This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2455linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2456for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2457about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2458
4f9c04f7 2459Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 24601021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2461run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2462has been used.
2463
2464The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2465enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2466
c0065db7
RM
2467@kindex --build-id
2468@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2469@item --build-id
2470@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c 2471Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
6033bf41 2472or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
61e2488c
JT
2473unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2474@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2475@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2476@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2477the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2478string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2479@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2480is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2481
2482The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2483that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2484unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2485to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2486file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2487string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2488
2489Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2490@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2491@end table
2492
0285c67d
NC
2493@c man end
2494
36f63dca 2495@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2496
0285c67d
NC
2497@c man begin OPTIONS
2498
ff5dcc92 2499The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2500the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2501normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2502use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2503@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2504like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2505symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2506object file).
2507
2508In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2509support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2510PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2511values by either a space or an equals sign.
2512
ff5dcc92 2513@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2514
2515@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2516@item --add-stdcall-alias
2517If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2518as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2519[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2520
2521@kindex --base-file
2522@item --base-file @var{file}
2523Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2524addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2525@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2526[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2527
2528@kindex --dll
2529@item --dll
2530Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2531@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2532file.
bb10df36 2533[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2534
88183869
DK
2535@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2536@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2537@item --enable-long-section-names
2538@itemx --disable-long-section-names
56e6cf80 2539The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
88183869 2540the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
56e6cf80
NC
2541for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2542fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
88183869
DK
2543to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2544allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2545disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2546generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2547as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2548with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2549GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2550information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2551option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2552section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2553when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2554image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2555[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2556
252b5132
RH
2557@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2558@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2559@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2560@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2561If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2562do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2563only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2564resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2565undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2566@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2567to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2568warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2569import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2570to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2571feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2572@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2573mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2574[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2575
522f09cd
KT
2576@kindex --leading-underscore
2577@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2578@item --leading-underscore
2579@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2580For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2581in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2582disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2583
252b5132
RH
2584@cindex DLLs, creating
2585@kindex --export-all-symbols
2586@item --export-all-symbols
2587If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2588be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2589otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2590explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2591attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2592option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2593@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2594@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2595exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2596re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2597such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2598@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2599@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2600Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2601not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2602extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2603(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2604These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2605@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2606@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2607@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2608@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2609[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2610
2611@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2612@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2613Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2614exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2615[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2616
2927aaca
NC
2617@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2618@item --exclude-all-symbols
2619Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2620[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2621
252b5132
RH
2622@kindex --file-alignment
2623@item --file-alignment
2624Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2625file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2626512.
bb10df36 2627[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2628
2629@cindex heap size
2630@kindex --heap
2631@item --heap @var{reserve}
2632@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2633Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2634to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2635committed.
bb10df36 2636[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2637
2638@cindex image base
2639@kindex --image-base
2640@item --image-base @var{value}
2641Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2642the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2643is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2644your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2645other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2646for dlls.
bb10df36 2647[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2648
2649@kindex --kill-at
2650@item --kill-at
2651If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2652symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2653[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2654
26d2d8a2
BF
2655@kindex --large-address-aware
2656@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2657If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2658header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2659greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2660or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2661section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2662[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2663
f69a2f97
NC
2664@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2665@item --disable-large-address-aware
2666Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2667This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2668driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2669addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2670[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2671
252b5132
RH
2672@kindex --major-image-version
2673@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2674Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2675[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2676
2677@kindex --major-os-version
2678@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2679Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2680[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2681
2682@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2683@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2684Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2685[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2686
2687@kindex --minor-image-version
2688@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2689Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2690[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2691
2692@kindex --minor-os-version
2693@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2694Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2695[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2696
2697@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2698@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2699Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2700[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2701
2702@cindex DEF files, creating
2703@cindex DLLs, creating
2704@kindex --output-def
2705@item --output-def @var{file}
2706The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2707file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2708(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2709library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2710automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2711[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2712
b044cda1 2713@cindex DLLs, creating
b044cda1
CW
2714@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2715@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2716@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2717Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2718@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2719By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2720for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2721execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2722[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2723
2724@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2725@item --disable-auto-image-base
2726Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2727user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2728default.
bb10df36 2729[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2730
2731@cindex DLLs, linking to
2732@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2733@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2734When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2735search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2736@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2737between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2738uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2739@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2740[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2741
2742@kindex --enable-auto-import
2743@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2744Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2745DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2746building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2747'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2748to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2749specification published by Microsoft.
2750
e2a83dd0
NC
2751Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2752data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2753placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2754around a problem with consts that is described here:
2755http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2756
4d8907ac
DS
2757Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2758see this message:
0d888aac 2759
ece2d90e 2760"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2761documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2762
ece2d90e
NC
2763This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2764ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2765allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2766fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2767constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2768multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2769this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2770of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2771the warning, and exit.
2772
2773There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2774data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2775
2fa9fc65
NC
2776One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2777of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2778this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2779
c0065db7
RM
2780A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2781that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2782there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2783a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2784
2785@example
2786extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2787extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2788 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2789@end example
2790
2791or
2792
2793@example
2794extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2795extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2796 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2797@end example
2798
c0065db7 2799For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2800is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2801
2802@example
2803extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2804extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2805 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2806@end example
2807
c406afaf
NC
2808or
2809
2810@example
2811extern long long extern_ll;
2812extern_ll -->
2813 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2814@end example
2815
2fa9fc65 2816A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2817'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2818@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2819requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2820building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2821merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2822between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2823constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2824
2825Original:
2826@example
2827--foo.h
2828extern int arr[];
2829--foo.c
2830#include "foo.h"
2831void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2832 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2833@}
2834@end example
2835
2836Solution 1:
2837@example
2838--foo.h
2839extern int arr[];
2840--foo.c
2841#include "foo.h"
2842void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2843 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2844 volatile int *parr = arr;
2845 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2846@}
2847@end example
2848
2849Solution 2:
2850@example
2851--foo.h
2852/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2853#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2854 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2855#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2856#else
2857#define FOO_IMPORT
2858#endif
2859extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2860--foo.c
2861#include "foo.h"
2862void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2863 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2864@}
2865@end example
2866
c0065db7 2867A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2868library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2869for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2870functions).
bb10df36 2871[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2872
2873@kindex --disable-auto-import
2874@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2875Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2876@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2877[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2878
2fa9fc65
NC
2879@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2880@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2881If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2882that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2883a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2884environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2885[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2886
2887@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2888@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2889Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
676ee43b 2890DLLs.
bb10df36 2891[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2892
b044cda1
CW
2893@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2894@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2895Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2896[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2897
252b5132
RH
2898@kindex --section-alignment
2899@item --section-alignment
2900Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2901addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2902[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2903
2904@cindex stack size
2905@kindex --stack
2906@item --stack @var{reserve}
2907@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2908Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2909to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2910committed.
bb10df36 2911[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2912
2913@kindex --subsystem
2914@item --subsystem @var{which}
2915@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2916@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2917Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2918legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2919@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2920the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2921@var{which}.
bb10df36 2922[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2923
2f563b51
DK
2924The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2925of the PE file header:
2926[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2927
2d5c3743
NC
2928@kindex --high-entropy-va
2929@item --high-entropy-va
2930Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2931(ASLR).
2932
2f563b51
DK
2933@kindex --dynamicbase
2934@item --dynamicbase
2935The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2936randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2937Vista for i386 PE targets.
2938
2939@kindex --forceinteg
2940@item --forceinteg
2941Code integrity checks are enforced.
2942
2943@kindex --nxcompat
2944@item --nxcompat
2945The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2946This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2947
2948@kindex --no-isolation
2949@item --no-isolation
2950Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2951
2952@kindex --no-seh
2953@item --no-seh
2954The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2955this image.
2956
2957@kindex --no-bind
2958@item --no-bind
2959Do not bind this image.
2960
2961@kindex --wdmdriver
2962@item --wdmdriver
2963The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 2964
2f563b51
DK
2965@kindex --tsaware
2966@item --tsaware
2967The image is Terminal Server aware.
2968
0cb112f7
CF
2969@kindex --insert-timestamp
2970@item --insert-timestamp
eeb14e5a
LZ
2971@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2972Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2973as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2974other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
56e6cf80 2975will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
eeb14e5a
LZ
2976same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2977can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
56e6cf80 2978that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
eeb14e5a 2979identically.
252b5132
RH
2980@end table
2981
0285c67d
NC
2982@c man end
2983
ac145307
BS
2984@ifset C6X
2985@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2986
2987@c man begin OPTIONS
2988
2989The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2990libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2991all executables use an index of 0.
2992
2993@table @gcctabopt
2994
2995@kindex --dsbt-size
2996@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
56e6cf80 2997This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
ac145307
BS
2998or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2999entries.
3000
3001@kindex --dsbt-index
3002@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
3003This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
3004to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
3005executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
3006@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
3007
fbd9ad90
PB
3008@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
3009The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
3010exidx entries in frame unwind info.
3011
ac145307
BS
3012@end table
3013
3014@c man end
3015@end ifset
3016
93fd0973
SC
3017@ifset M68HC11
3018@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
3019
3020@c man begin OPTIONS
3021
3022The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
3023memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
3024
3025@table @gcctabopt
3026
3027@kindex --no-trampoline
3028@item --no-trampoline
3029This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
3030is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
3031instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
3032
3033@kindex --bank-window
3034@item --bank-window @var{name}
3035This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
3036the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
3037The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
3038paging and addresses within the memory window.
3039
3040@end table
3041
3042@c man end
3043@end ifset
3044
7fb9f789
NC
3045@ifset M68K
3046@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3047
3048@c man begin OPTIONS
3049
3050The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3051when linking for 68K targets.
3052
3053@table @gcctabopt
3054
3055@kindex --got
3056@item --got=@var{type}
3057This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3058@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3059@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3060Info entry for @file{ld}.
3061
3062@end table
3063
3064@c man end
3065@end ifset
3066
833794fc
MR
3067@ifset MIPS
3068@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3069
3070@c man begin OPTIONS
3071
3072The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
8b10b0b3
MR
3073generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3074linking for MIPS targets.
833794fc
MR
3075
3076@table @gcctabopt
3077
3078@kindex --insn32
3079@item --insn32
3080@kindex --no-insn32
3081@itemx --no-insn32
3082These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3083generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3084or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
308532-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3086used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3087possible.
3088
8b10b0b3
MR
3089@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3090@item --ignore-branch-isa
3091@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3092@itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3093These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3094transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3095accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3096is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3097instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3098equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3099calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3100a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3101an error.
3102
833794fc
MR
3103@end table
3104
3105@c man end
3106@end ifset
3107
252b5132
RH
3108@ifset UsesEnvVars
3109@node Environment
3110@section Environment Variables
3111
0285c67d
NC
3112@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3113
560e09e9 3114You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
3115@ifclear SingleFormat
3116@code{GNUTARGET},
3117@end ifclear
3118@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 3119
36f63dca 3120@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
3121@kindex GNUTARGET
3122@cindex default input format
3123@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3124use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3125of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 3126@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
3127of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3128attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3129this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3130there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3131object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3132BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3133in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 3134@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
3135
3136@kindex LDEMULATION
3137@cindex default emulation
3138@cindex emulation, default
3139@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3140@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3141behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3142available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3143the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3144variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3145linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
3146
3147@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3148@cindex demangling, default
3149Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3150@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3151default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3152a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3153may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3154options.
3155
0285c67d
NC
3156@c man end
3157@end ifset
3158
252b5132
RH
3159@node Scripts
3160@chapter Linker Scripts
3161
3162@cindex scripts
3163@cindex linker scripts
3164@cindex command files
3165Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3166written in the linker command language.
3167
3168The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3169the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3170the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3171more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3172direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3173described below.
3174
3175The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3176yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3177linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
3178to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
3179such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3180
3181You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3182line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3183default linker script.
3184
3185You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3186to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3187Linker Scripts}.
3188
3189@menu
3190* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3191* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3192* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3193* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3194* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3195* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3196* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3197* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3198* VERSION:: VERSION Command
3199* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3200* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3201@end menu
3202
3203@node Basic Script Concepts
3204@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3205@cindex linker script concepts
3206We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3207describe the linker script language.
3208
3209The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3210file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3211@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3212The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3213purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3214among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3215section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3216in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3217
3218Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3219also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 3220contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
3221the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3222A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3223area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3224loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3225which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3226of debugging information.
3227
3228Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3229first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3230the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3231@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3232section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3233same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3234is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3235(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3236based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3237RAM address would be the VMA.
3238
3239You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3240program with the @samp{-h} option.
3241
3242Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3243@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3244has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3245information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3246will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3247static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3248referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3249
3250You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3251program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3252option.
3253
3254@node Script Format
3255@section Linker Script Format
3256@cindex linker script format
3257Linker scripts are text files.
3258
3259You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3260either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3261symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3262generally ignored.
3263
3264Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3265If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3266otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3267double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3268file name.
3269
3270You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3271@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3272to whitespace.
3273
3274@node Simple Example
3275@section Simple Linker Script Example
3276@cindex linker script example
3277@cindex example of linker script
3278Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3279
3280The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3281@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3282memory layout of the output file.
3283
3284The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3285describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3286code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3287@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3288Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3289your input files.
3290
3291For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
32920x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3293linker script which will do that:
3294@smallexample
3295SECTIONS
3296@{
3297 . = 0x10000;
3298 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3299 . = 0x8000000;
3300 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3301 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3302@}
3303@end smallexample
3304
3305You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3306followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3307descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3308
252b5132
RH
3309The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3310sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3311counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3312other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3313current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3314incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3315@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3316
3317The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3318required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3319after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3320which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3321wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3322means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3323
3324Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3325@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3326@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3327
3328The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3329the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3330at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3331output section, the value of the location counter will be
3332@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3333effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3334immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3335
3336The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3337alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3338example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3339sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3340may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3341sections.
3342
3343That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3344
3345@node Simple Commands
3346@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3347@cindex linker script simple commands
3348In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3349
3350@menu
3351* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3352* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3353@ifclear SingleFormat
3354* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3355@end ifclear
3356
4a93e180 3357* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3358* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3359@end menu
3360
3361@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3362@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3363@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3364@cindex start of execution
3365@cindex first instruction
3366@cindex entry point
3367The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3368point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3369entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3370@smallexample
3371ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3372@end smallexample
3373
3374There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3375entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3376stopping when one of them succeeds:
3377@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3378@item
252b5132 3379the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3380@item
252b5132 3381the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3382@item
3ab904c4
NC
3383the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3384targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3385check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3386@item
252b5132 3387the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3388@item
252b5132
RH
3389The address @code{0}.
3390@end itemize
3391
3392@node File Commands
36f63dca 3393@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3394@cindex linker script file commands
3395Several linker script commands deal with files.
3396
3397@table @code
3398@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3399@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3400@cindex including a linker script
3401Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3402be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3403with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
340410 levels deep.
3405
4006703d
NS
3406You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3407@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3408
252b5132
RH
3409@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3410@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3411@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3412@cindex input files in linker scripts
3413@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3414@cindex linker script input object files
3415The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3416in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3417
3418For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3419a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3420then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3421
3422In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3423script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3424
e3f2db7f
AO
3425In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3426with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3427located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3428for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3429open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
cad60a33
HPN
3430linker will search through the archive library search path.
3431The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3aa2d05a
NC
3432as the first character in the filename path, or prefixing the filename
3433path with @code{$SYSROOT}. See also the description of @samp{-L} in
3434@ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3435
ff5dcc92 3436If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3437name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3438@samp{-l}.
3439
3440When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3441files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3442script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3443
3444@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3445@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3446@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3447@cindex grouping input files
3448The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3449files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3450new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3451in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3452
b717d30e
JJ
3453@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3454@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3455@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3456This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3457commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3458as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3459with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3460when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3461@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3462and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3463setting afterwards.
3464
252b5132
RH
3465@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3466@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3467@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3468The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3469@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3470@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3471Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3472precedence.
3473
3474You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3475output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3476
3477@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3478@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3479@cindex library search path in linker script
3480@cindex archive search path in linker script
3481@cindex search path in linker script
3482The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3483@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3484@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3485on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3486are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3487the command line option are searched first.
3488
3489@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3490@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3491@cindex first input file
3492The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3493that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3494though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3495when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3496first file.
3497@end table
3498
3499@ifclear SingleFormat
3500@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3501@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3502A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3503
3504@table @code
3505@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3506@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3507@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3508@cindex output file format in linker script
3509The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3510output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3511exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3512(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3513line option takes precedence.
3514
3515You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3516formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3517This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3518desired endianness.
3519
3520If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3521will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3522output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3523used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3524
3525For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3526command:
3527@smallexample
3528OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3529@end smallexample
3530This says that the default format for the output file is
3531@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3532option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3533format.
3534
3535@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3536@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3537@cindex input file format in linker script
3538The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3539files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3540This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3541(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3542is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3543command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3544@end table
3545@end ifclear
3546
4a93e180
NC
3547@node REGION_ALIAS
3548@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3549@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3550@cindex region alias
3551@cindex region names
3552
3553Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3554@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3555
3556@smallexample
3557REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3558@end smallexample
3559
3560The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3561memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3562to memory regions. An example follows.
3563
3564Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3565memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3566that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3567non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3568access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3569read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3570sections:
3571
3572@itemize @bullet
3573@item
3574@code{.text} program code;
3575@item
3576@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3577@item
3578@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3579@item
3580@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3581@end itemize
3582
3583The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3584part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3585output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3586systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3587@code{C}:
3588@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3589@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3590@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3591@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3592@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3593@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3594@end multitable
3595The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3596loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3597the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3598the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3599
3600The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3601includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3602memory layout:
3603@smallexample
3604INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3605
3606SECTIONS
3607 @{
3608 .text :
3609 @{
3610 *(.text)
3611 @} > REGION_TEXT
3612 .rodata :
3613 @{
3614 *(.rodata)
3615 rodata_end = .;
3616 @} > REGION_RODATA
3617 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3618 @{
3619 data_start = .;
3620 *(.data)
3621 @} > REGION_DATA
3622 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3623 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3624 .bss :
3625 @{
3626 *(.bss)
3627 @} > REGION_BSS
3628 @}
3629@end smallexample
3630
3631Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3632regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3633variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3634@table @code
3635@item A
3636Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3637@smallexample
3638MEMORY
3639 @{
3640 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3641 @}
3642
3643REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3644REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3645REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3646REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3647@end smallexample
3648@item B
3649Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3650into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3651@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3652@smallexample
3653MEMORY
3654 @{
3655 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3656 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3657 @}
3658
3659REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3660REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3661REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3662REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3663@end smallexample
3664@item C
3665Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3666@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3667initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3668system start into the @code{RAM}.
3669@smallexample
3670MEMORY
3671 @{
3672 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3673 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3674 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3675 @}
3676
3677REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3678REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3679REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3680REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3681@end smallexample
3682@end table
3683
3684It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3685@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3686necessary:
3687@smallexample
3688#include <string.h>
3689
3690extern char data_start [];
3691extern char data_size [];
3692extern char data_load_start [];
3693
3694void copy_data(void)
3695@{
3696 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3697 @{
3698 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3699 @}
3700@}
3701@end smallexample
3702
252b5132 3703@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3704@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3705There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3706
3707@table @code
3708@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3709@kindex ASSERT
3710@cindex assertion in linker script
3711Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3712with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3713
fd1c4238
NC
3714Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3715take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3716inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3717for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3718symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3719
3720@smallexample
3721 .stack :
3722 @{
3723 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3724 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3725 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3726 @}
3727@end smallexample
3728
3729will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3730PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3731can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3732
3733@smallexample
3734 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3735 .stack :
3736 @{
3737 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3738 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3739 @}
3740@end smallexample
3741
3742will work.
3743
252b5132
RH
3744@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3745@kindex EXTERN
3746@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3747Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3748symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3749modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3750each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3751command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3752
3753@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3754@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3755@cindex common allocation in linker script
3756This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3757to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3758output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3759
4818e05f
AM
3760@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3761@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3762@cindex common allocation in linker script
3763This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3764command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3765to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3766
7bdf4127
AB
3767@item FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3768@kindex FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3769@cindex group allocation in linker script
3770@cindex section groups
3771@cindex COMDAT
3772This command has the same effect as the
3773@samp{--force-group-allocation} command-line option: to make
3774@command{ld} place section group members like normal input sections,
3775and to delete the section groups even if a relocatable output file is
3776specified (@samp{-r}).
3777
53d25da6
AM
3778@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3779@kindex INSERT
3780@cindex insert user script into default script
3781This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3782augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3783inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3784@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3785default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3786sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3787linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3788insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3789linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3790default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3791of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3792to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3793is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3794
3795@smallexample
3796SECTIONS
3797@{
3798 OVERLAY :
3799 @{
3800 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3801 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3802 @}
3803@}
3804INSERT AFTER .text;
3805@end smallexample
3806
252b5132
RH
3807@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3808@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3809@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3810This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3811references among certain output sections.
3812
3813In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3814using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3815will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3816errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3817a function defined in the other section.
3818
3819The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3820@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3821an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3822@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3823names.
3824
cdf96953
MF
3825@item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3826@kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3827@cindex cross references
3828This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3829references to one section from a list of other sections.
3830
3831The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3832output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3833a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3834there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3835must never call back.
3836
3837The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3838The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3839If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3840the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3841status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3842names, not input section names.
3843
252b5132
RH
3844@ifclear SingleFormat
3845@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3846@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3847@cindex machine architecture
3848@cindex architecture
3849Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3850of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3851architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3852the @samp{-f} option.
3853@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3854
3855@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3856@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3857This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3858@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3859in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3860@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3861@end table
3862
3863@node Assignments
3864@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3865@cindex assignment in scripts
3866@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3867@cindex variables, defining
3868You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3869the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3870
3871@menu
3872* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3873* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3874* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3875* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3876* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3877@end menu
3878
3879@node Simple Assignments
3880@subsection Simple Assignments
3881
3882You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3883
3884@table @code
3885@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3886@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3887@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3888@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3889@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3890@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3891@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3892@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3893@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3894@end table
3895
3896The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3897@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3898defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3899
3900The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3901may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3902
3903The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3904
3905Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3906
3907You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3908statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3909section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3910
3911The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3912expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3913
3914Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3915assignments may be used:
3916
3917@smallexample
3918floating_point = 0;
3919SECTIONS
3920@{
3921 .text :
3922 @{
3923 *(.text)
3924 _etext = .;
3925 @}
156e34dd 3926 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3927 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3928@}
3929@end smallexample
3930@noindent
3931In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3932zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3933the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3934defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3935upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3936
eb8476a6
MR
3937@node HIDDEN
3938@subsection HIDDEN
3939@cindex HIDDEN
3940For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3941exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3942
3943Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3944@code{HIDDEN}:
3945
3946@smallexample
3947HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3948SECTIONS
3949@{
3950 .text :
3951 @{
3952 *(.text)
3953 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3954 @}
3955 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3956 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3957@}
3958@end smallexample
3959@noindent
3960In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3961
252b5132
RH
3962@node PROVIDE
3963@subsection PROVIDE
3964@cindex PROVIDE
3965In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3966only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3967the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3968@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3969@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3970@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3971@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3972@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3973
3974Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3975@smallexample
3976SECTIONS
3977@{
3978 .text :
3979 @{
3980 *(.text)
3981 _etext = .;
3982 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3983 @}
3984@}
3985@end smallexample
3986
3987In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3988underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3989the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3990underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3991If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3992linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3993
7af8e998
L
3994@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3995@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3996@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3997Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3998hidden and won't be exported.
3999
73ae6183
NC
4000@node Source Code Reference
4001@subsection Source Code Reference
4002
4003Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
4004intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
4005a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
4006symbol that does not have a value.
4007
4008Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
4009transform names in the source code into different names when they are
4010stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
4011prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
4012mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
4013of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
4014variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
4015linker script variable might be referred to as:
4016
4017@smallexample
4018 extern int foo;
4019@end smallexample
4020
4021But in the linker script it might be defined as:
4022
4023@smallexample
4024 _foo = 1000;
4025@end smallexample
4026
4027In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
4028transformation has taken place.
4029
4030When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
4031things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
4032in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
4033second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
4034table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
4035contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
4036value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
4037
4038@smallexample
4039 int foo = 1000;
4040@end smallexample
4041
10bf6894 4042creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
4043holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
4044number 1000 is initially stored.
4045
4046When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
4047first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
4048memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
4049So:
4050
4051@smallexample
4052 foo = 1;
4053@end smallexample
4054
4055looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4056associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4057address. Whereas:
4058
4059@smallexample
4060 int * a = & foo;
4061@end smallexample
4062
10bf6894 4063looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
4064and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4065the variable @samp{a}.
4066
4067Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4068the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4069an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4070
4071@smallexample
4072 foo = 1000;
4073@end smallexample
4074
4075creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4076the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4077address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4078linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4079access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4080
4081Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4082you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4083use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4084section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4085linker script contains these declarations:
4086
4087@smallexample
4088@group
4089 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
a5e406b5 4090 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
73ae6183
NC
4091 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4092@end group
4093@end smallexample
4094
4095Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4096
4097@smallexample
4098@group
4099 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 4100
73ae6183
NC
4101 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4102@end group
4103@end smallexample
4104
4105Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
5707d2ad
NC
4106Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4107arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4108
4109@smallexample
4110@group
4111 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4112
4113 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4114@end group
4115@end smallexample
4116
4117Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4118operators.
73ae6183 4119
252b5132 4120@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 4121@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
4122@kindex SECTIONS
4123The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4124into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4125
4126The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4127@smallexample
4128SECTIONS
4129@{
4130 @var{sections-command}
4131 @var{sections-command}
4132 @dots{}
4133@}
4134@end smallexample
4135
4136Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4137
4138@itemize @bullet
4139@item
4140an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4141@item
4142a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4143@item
4144an output section description
4145@item
4146an overlay description
4147@end itemize
4148
4149The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4150@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4151those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4152understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4153the layout of the output file.
4154
4155Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4156below.
4157
4158If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4159linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4160section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4161input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4162example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4163in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4164
4165@menu
4166* Output Section Description:: Output section description
4167* Output Section Name:: Output section name
4168* Output Section Address:: Output section address
4169* Input Section:: Input section description
4170* Output Section Data:: Output section data
4171* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4172* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4173* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4174* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4175@end menu
4176
4177@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 4178@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
4179The full description of an output section looks like this:
4180@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4181@group
7e7d5768 4182@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 4183 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 4184 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
4185 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4186 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4187 @{
4188 @var{output-section-command}
4189 @var{output-section-command}
4190 @dots{}
abc9061b 4191 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4192@end group
4193@end smallexample
4194
4195Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4196
4197The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4198name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
4199The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4200the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
4201The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4202
4203Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4204
4205@itemize @bullet
4206@item
4207a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4208@item
4209an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4210@item
4211data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4212@item
4213a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4214@end itemize
4215
4216@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 4217@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
4218@cindex name, section
4219@cindex section name
4220The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4221meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4222support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4223must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4224example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4225output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4226names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4227quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4228characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4229commas must be quoted.
4230
4231The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4232Discarding}.
4233
4234@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 4235@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
4236@cindex address, section
4237@cindex section address
4238The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
4239address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4240is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4241
4242If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4243section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4244to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4245alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4246contained within the output section.
4247
4248The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4249
4250@itemize @bullet
4251@item
4252If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4253is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4254in that region.
4255
4256@item
4257If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4258regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4259section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4260be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4261
4262@item
4263If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4264the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4265counter.
4266@end itemize
4267
4268@noindent
4269For example:
4270
252b5132
RH
4271@smallexample
4272.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4273@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4274
252b5132
RH
4275@noindent
4276and
ea5cae92 4277
252b5132
RH
4278@smallexample
4279.text : @{ *(.text) @}
4280@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4281
252b5132
RH
4282@noindent
4283are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4284@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4285counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
4286counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4287input sections.
252b5132
RH
4288
4289The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4290For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4291so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4292do something like this:
4293@smallexample
4294.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4295@end smallexample
4296@noindent
4297This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4298aligned upward to the specified value.
4299
4300Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
4301location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4302sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
4303
4304@node Input Section
36f63dca 4305@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
4306@cindex input sections
4307@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4308The most common output section command is an input section description.
4309
4310The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4311You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4312in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4313map the input files into your memory layout.
4314
4315@menu
4316* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4317* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4318* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4319* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4320* Input Section Example:: Input section example
4321@end menu
4322
4323@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 4324@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
4325@cindex input section basics
4326An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4327by a list of section names in parentheses.
4328
4329The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4330describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4331
4332The most common input section description is to include all input
4333sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4334include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4335@smallexample
4336*(.text)
4337@end smallexample
4338@noindent
18625d54 4339Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
8f1732fc 4340@cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
18625d54
CM
4341of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4342match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4343example:
252b5132 4344@smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4345EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4346@end smallexample
4347@noindent
4348will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4349and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4350placed inside the section list, for example:
4351@smallexample
b4346c09 4352*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 4353@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4354@noindent
4355The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4356two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4357more than one section, as described below.
252b5132
RH
4358
4359There are two ways to include more than one section:
4360@smallexample
4361*(.text .rdata)
4362*(.text) *(.rdata)
4363@end smallexample
4364@noindent
4365The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4366@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
4367first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4368they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
4369@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4370@samp{.rdata} input sections.
4371
8f1732fc
AB
4372When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4373is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4374immediately following section, for example:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4375@smallexample
4376*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4377@end smallexample
4378@noindent
4379will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4380@file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4381from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4382exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
8f1732fc 4383could be modified to:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4384@smallexample
4385*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4386@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4387@noindent
4388Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4389before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4390all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4391@smallexample
4392EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4393@end smallexample
a5bf7d4f 4394
252b5132
RH
4395You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4396You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4397needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4398@smallexample
4399data.o(.data)
4400@end smallexample
4401
ae17ab41
CM
4402To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4403of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4404
4405Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4406
4407@smallexample
4408@group
4409SECTIONS @{
4410 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4411 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4412@}
4413@end group
4414@end smallexample
4415
4416In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4417input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4418@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4419@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4420whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4421
967928e9
AM
4422You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4423matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4424with no whitespace around the colon.
4425
4426@table @samp
4427@item archive:file
4428matches file within archive
4429@item archive:
4430matches the whole archive
4431@item :file
4432matches file but not one in an archive
4433@end table
4434
4435Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4436wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4437single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4438@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4439within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4440also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4441other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4442from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4443command.
4444
252b5132
RH
4445If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4446the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4447commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4448@smallexample
4449data.o
4450@end smallexample
4451
967928e9
AM
4452When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4453and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4454characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4455name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4456did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4457though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4458@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4459the archive search path.
4460
4461@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4462@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4463@cindex input section wildcards
4464@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4465@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4466@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4467In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4468name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4469
4470The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4471pattern for the file name.
4472
4473The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4474
4475@table @samp
4476@item *
4477matches any number of characters
4478@item ?
4479matches any single character
4480@item [@var{chars}]
4481matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4482character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4483@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4484@item \
4485quotes the following character
4486@end table
4487
4488When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4489will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4490Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4491exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4492@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4493a @samp{/} character.
4494
4495File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4496specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4497does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4498
4499If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4500appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4501will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4502sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4503@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4504@smallexample
4505.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4506.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4507@end smallexample
4508
bcaa7b3e 4509@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4510Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4511in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4512this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4513pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4514@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4515into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4516
bcaa7b3e
L
4517@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4518@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4519difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
1ae5c3ae 4520descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
ee83b8a6
NC
4521Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4522reduce the amount of padding necessary.
bcaa7b3e 4523
02ecc8e9
L
4524@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4525@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4526difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4527ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4528encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4529
bcaa7b3e
L
4530@cindex SORT
4531@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4532
4533When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4534can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4535
4536@enumerate
4537@item
4538@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4539It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4540sections have the same name.
4541@item
4542@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4543It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4544sections have the same alignment.
4545@item
c0065db7 4546@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4547treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4548@item
4549@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4550is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4551@item
4552All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4553@end enumerate
4554
4555When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4556section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4557takes precedence over the command line option.
4558
4559If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4560command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4561treated as nested sorting command.
4562
4563@enumerate
4564@item
4565@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4566@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4567@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4568@item
4569@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4570@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4571@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4572@end enumerate
4573
4574If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4575command line option will be ignored.
4576
eda680f8
L
4577@cindex SORT_NONE
4578@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4579section sorting option.
4580
252b5132
RH
4581If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4582@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4583precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4584
4585This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4586files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4587sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4588The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4589with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4590linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4591@smallexample
4592@group
4593SECTIONS @{
4594 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4595 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4596 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4597 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4598@}
4599@end group
4600@end smallexample
4601
4602@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4603@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4604@cindex common symbol placement
4605@cindex uninitialized data placement
4606A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4607file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4608linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4609named @samp{COMMON}.
4610
4611You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4612other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4613particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4614input files are placed in another section.
4615
4616In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4617@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4618@smallexample
4619.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4620@end smallexample
4621
4622@cindex scommon section
4623@cindex small common symbols
4624Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4625example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4626symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4627different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4628the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4629symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4630to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4631locations.
4632
4633@cindex [COMMON]
4634You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4635notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4636@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4637
4638@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4639@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4640@cindex KEEP
4641@cindex garbage collection
4642When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4643it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4644This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4645with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4646@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4647
4648@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4649@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4650The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4651to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4652start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4653@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4654follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4655@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4656@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4657All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4658files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4659
4660@smallexample
4661@group
4662SECTIONS @{
4663 outputa 0x10000 :
4664 @{
4665 all.o
4666 foo.o (.input1)
4667 @}
36f63dca
NC
4668@end group
4669@group
252b5132
RH
4670 outputb :
4671 @{
4672 foo.o (.input2)
4673 foo1.o (.input1)
4674 @}
36f63dca
NC
4675@end group
4676@group
252b5132
RH
4677 outputc :
4678 @{
4679 *(.input1)
4680 *(.input2)
4681 @}
4682@}
4683@end group
a1ab1d2a 4684@end smallexample
252b5132 4685
cbd0eecf
L
4686If an output section's name is the same as the input section's name
4687and is representable as a C identifier, then the linker will
4688automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols: __start_SECNAME and
4689__stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the section. These
4690indicate the start address and end address of the output section
4691respectively. Note: most section names are not representable as
4692C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.} character.
4693
252b5132 4694@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4695@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4696@cindex data
4697@cindex section data
4698@cindex output section data
4699@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4700@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4701@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4702@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4703@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4704You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4705@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4706an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4707parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4708value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4709counter.
4710
4711The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4712store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4713bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4714stored.
4715
4716For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4717of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4718@smallexample
4719BYTE(1)
4720LONG(addr)
4721@end smallexample
4722
4723When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4724same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4725target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4726@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4727@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4728
4729If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4730which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4731When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4732true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4733endianness of the first input object file.
4734
36f63dca 4735Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4736between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4737@smallexample
4738SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4739@end smallexample
4740whereas this will work:
4741@smallexample
4742SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4743@end smallexample
4744
252b5132
RH
4745@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4746@cindex holes, filling
4747@cindex unspecified memory
4748You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4749current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4750otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4751gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4752with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4753necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4754point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4755than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4756different parts of an output section.
4757
4758This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4759value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4760@smallexample
563e308f 4761FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4762@end smallexample
4763
4764The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4765section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4766part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4767entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4768precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4769expression.
252b5132
RH
4770
4771@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4772@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4773There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4774commands.
4775
4776@table @code
4777@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4778@cindex input filename symbols
4779@cindex filename symbols
4780@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4781The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4782The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4783file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4784the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4785
4786This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4787normally used for any other object file format.
4788
4789@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4790@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4791@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4792@item CONSTRUCTORS
4793When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4794unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4795destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4796arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4797automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4798For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4799linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4800@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4801ignored for other object file formats.
4802
4803The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4804constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4805Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4806the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4807first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4808of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4809compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4810formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4811@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4812the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4813destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4814@code{exit}.
4815
4816For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4817arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4818addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4819and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4820linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4821runtime code expects to see.
4822
4823@smallexample
4824 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4825 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4826 *(.ctors)
4827 LONG(0)
4828 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4829 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4830 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4831 *(.dtors)
4832 LONG(0)
4833 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4834@end smallexample
4835
4836If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4837which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4838are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4839are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4840command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4841@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4842@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4843@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4844
4845Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4846and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4847need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4848scripts.
4849
4850@end table
4851
4852@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4853@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4854@cindex discarding sections
4855@cindex sections, discarding
4856@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
4857The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4858This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4859may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4860@smallexample
49c13adb 4861.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4862@end smallexample
4863@noindent
4864will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4865@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4866sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
4867space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4868too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4869space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4870@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4871@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4872This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 4873
a0976ea4 4874The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4875on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4876symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4877the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4878section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4879
4880@cindex /DISCARD/
4881The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4882input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4883section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4884
4885@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4886@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4887@cindex output section attributes
4888We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4889like this:
0c71d759 4890
252b5132 4891@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4892@group
7e7d5768 4893@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4894 [AT(@var{lma})]
4895 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4896 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4897 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4898 @{
4899 @var{output-section-command}
4900 @var{output-section-command}
4901 @dots{}
562d3460 4902 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4903@end group
4904@end smallexample
0c71d759 4905
252b5132
RH
4906We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4907@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4908remaining section attributes.
4909
a1ab1d2a 4910@menu
252b5132
RH
4911* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4912* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4913* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4914* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4915* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4916* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4917* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4918* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4919@end menu
4920
4921@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4922@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4923Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4924parentheses. The following types are defined:
4925
4926@table @code
4927@item NOLOAD
4928The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4929loaded into memory when the program is run.
4930@item DSECT
4931@itemx COPY
4932@itemx INFO
4933@itemx OVERLAY
4934These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4935rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4936marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4937section when the program is run.
4938@end table
4939
4940@kindex NOLOAD
4941@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4942@cindex loading, preventing
4943The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4944the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4945the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4946@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4947need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4948@smallexample
4949@group
4950SECTIONS @{
4951 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4952 @dots{}
4953@}
4954@end group
4955@end smallexample
4956
4957@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4958@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4959@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4960@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4961@cindex load address
4962@cindex section load address
4963Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4964@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4965@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4966specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4967address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4968
ea5cae92
NC
4969The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4970specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4971takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4972load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4973region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4974
4975If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4976section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4977load address:
4978
4979@itemize @bullet
4980@item
4981If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4982the LMA address as well.
4983
4984@item
4985If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4986
4987@item
4988Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4989with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4990section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4991VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4992the last section in the located region.
4993
4994@item
4995If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4996that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4997
4998@item
4999If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
5000section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
5001@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5002
5003@cindex ROM initialized data
5004@cindex initialized data in ROM
5005This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
5006example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
5007called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
5008@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
5009even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
5010uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
5011defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
5012counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
5013
5014@smallexample
5015@group
5016SECTIONS
5017 @{
5018 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 5019 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
5020 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
5021 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
5022 .bss 0x3000 :
5023 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
5024@}
5025@end group
5026@end smallexample
5027
5028The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
5029this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
5030the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
5031how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
5032script.
5033
5034@smallexample
5035@group
5036extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
5037char *src = &_etext;
5038char *dst = &_data;
5039
ea5cae92
NC
5040/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
5041while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 5042 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 5043
ea5cae92 5044/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
5045for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
5046 *dst = 0;
5047@end group
5048@end smallexample
5049
bbf115d3
L
5050@node Forced Output Alignment
5051@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
5052@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
5053@cindex forcing output section alignment
5054@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 5055You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
5056alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
5057intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 5058
7e7d5768
AM
5059@node Forced Input Alignment
5060@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
5061@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
5062@cindex forcing input section alignment
5063@cindex input section alignment
5064You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5065SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5066sections, whether larger or smaller.
5067
0c71d759
NC
5068@node Output Section Constraint
5069@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5070@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
5071@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
5072@cindex constraints on output sections
5073You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5074of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5075read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5076@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5077
252b5132 5078@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 5079@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
5080@kindex >@var{region}
5081@cindex section, assigning to memory region
5082@cindex memory regions and sections
5083You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5084using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5085
5086Here is a simple example:
5087@smallexample
5088@group
5089MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5090SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5091@end group
5092@end smallexample
5093
5094@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 5095@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
5096@kindex :@var{phdr}
5097@cindex section, assigning to program header
5098@cindex program headers and sections
5099You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5100using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5101one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5102assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5103@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5104linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5105
5106Here is a simple example:
5107@smallexample
5108@group
5109PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5110SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5111@end group
5112@end smallexample
5113
5114@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 5115@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
5116@kindex =@var{fillexp}
5117@cindex section fill pattern
5118@cindex fill pattern, entire section
5119You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5120@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5121(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5122within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
5123alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5124necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 5125of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
5126an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5127fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 5128other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
5129pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5130expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
5131
5132You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 5133output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
5134
5135Here is a simple example:
5136@smallexample
5137@group
563e308f 5138SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
5139@end group
5140@end smallexample
5141
5142@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 5143@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
5144@kindex OVERLAY
5145@cindex overlays
5146An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5147are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5148the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5149copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5150required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5151can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5152than another.
5153
5154Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5155@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5156output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5157command is as follows:
5158@smallexample
5159@group
5160OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5161 @{
5162 @var{secname1}
5163 @{
5164 @var{output-section-command}
5165 @var{output-section-command}
5166 @dots{}
5167 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5168 @var{secname2}
5169 @{
5170 @var{output-section-command}
5171 @var{output-section-command}
5172 @dots{}
5173 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5174 @dots{}
abc9061b 5175 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
5176@end group
5177@end smallexample
5178
5179Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5180section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5181section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 5182those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
5183except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5184sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5185
abc9061b
CC
5186The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5187the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5188
252b5132
RH
5189The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5190addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5191memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5192whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5193and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5194and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5195
56dd11f0
NC
5196If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5197references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5198the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5199sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5200@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
5201
5202For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 5203provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
5204defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5205@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5206the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5207within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5208symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5209
5210At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5211the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5212
5213Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5214@code{SECTIONS} construct.
5215@smallexample
5216@group
5217 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5218 @{
5219 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5220 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5221 @}
5222@end group
5223@end smallexample
5224@noindent
5225This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5226address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5227@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 5228following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
5229@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5230@code{__load_stop_text1}.
5231
5232C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5233like the following.
5234
5235@smallexample
5236@group
5237 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5238 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5239 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5240@end group
5241@end smallexample
5242
5243Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5244everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5245example could have been written identically as follows.
5246
5247@smallexample
5248@group
5249 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5250 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5251 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 5252 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5253 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5254 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
5255 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5256@end group
5257@end smallexample
5258
5259@node MEMORY
36f63dca 5260@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
5261@kindex MEMORY
5262@cindex memory regions
5263@cindex regions of memory
5264@cindex allocating memory
5265@cindex discontinuous memory
5266The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5267memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5268
5269The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5270memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5271may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5272can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5273set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5274regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5275around to fit into the available regions.
5276
127fcdff
AB
5277A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5278however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5279specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5280@code{MEMORY} is:
252b5132
RH
5281@smallexample
5282@group
a1ab1d2a 5283MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5284 @{
5285 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5286 @dots{}
5287 @}
5288@end group
5289@end smallexample
5290
5291The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5292region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5293Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5294with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
5295must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5296add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 5297command.
252b5132
RH
5298
5299@cindex memory region attributes
5300The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5301whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5302not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5303@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5304section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5305the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5306them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5307
5308The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5309@table @samp
5310@item R
5311Read-only section
5312@item W
5313Read/write section
5314@item X
5315Executable section
5316@item A
5317Allocatable section
5318@item I
5319Initialized section
5320@item L
5321Same as @samp{I}
5322@item !
c09e9a8c 5323Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
5324@end table
5325
5326If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5327@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5328attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5329in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5330attributes.
5331
5332@kindex ORIGIN =
5333@kindex o =
5334@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
5335The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5336the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5337cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5338abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5339@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
5340
5341@kindex LENGTH =
5342@kindex len =
5343@kindex l =
5344The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5345region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
5346be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5347@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
5348
5349In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5350available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5351and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5352linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5353is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5354or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5355explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5356region.
5357
5358@smallexample
5359@group
a1ab1d2a 5360MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5361 @{
5362 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5363 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5364 @}
5365@end group
5366@end smallexample
5367
5368Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5369specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5370@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5371a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5372output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5373was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5374the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5375output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5376region, the linker will issue an error message.
5377
3ec57632 5378It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 5379expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
5380@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5381
5382@smallexample
5383@group
c0065db7 5384 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
5385@end group
5386@end smallexample
5387
252b5132
RH
5388@node PHDRS
5389@section PHDRS Command
5390@kindex PHDRS
5391@cindex program headers
5392@cindex ELF program headers
5393@cindex program segments
5394@cindex segments, ELF
5395The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5396@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5397loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5398program with the @samp{-p} option.
5399
5400When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5401reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5402program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5403This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5404interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5405
5406The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5407in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5408precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5409the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5410not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5411
5412The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5413generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5414ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5415
5416This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5417@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5418
5419@smallexample
5420@group
5421PHDRS
5422@{
5423 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5424 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5425@}
5426@end group
5427@end smallexample
5428
5429The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5430of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5431header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5432with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
5433must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5434is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
5435
5436Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5437system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5438specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5439sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5440attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5441Section Phdr}.
5442
5443It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5444merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5445repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5446contain the section.
5447
5448If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5449then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5450not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5451convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5452placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5453default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5454segment at all.
5455
5456@kindex FILEHDR
5457@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5458You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5459the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5460The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5461file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5462include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5463segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5464these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5465
5466The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5467value of the keyword.
5468
5469@table @asis
5470@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5471Indicates an unused program header.
5472
5473@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5474Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5475the file.
5476
5477@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5478Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5479
5480@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5481Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5482found.
5483
5484@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5485Indicates a segment holding note information.
5486
5487@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5488A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5489ABI.
5490
5491@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5492Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5493
1a9ccd70
NC
5494@item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5495Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5496
252b5132
RH
5497@item @var{expression}
5498An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5499be used for types not defined above.
5500@end table
5501
5502You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5503in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5504@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5505Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5506output section attribute.
5507
5508The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5509which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5510explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5511an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5512header.
5513
5514Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5515headers used on a native ELF system.
5516
5517@example
5518@group
5519PHDRS
5520@{
5521 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5522 interp PT_INTERP ;
5523 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5524 data PT_LOAD ;
5525 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5526@}
5527
5528SECTIONS
5529@{
5530 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5531 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5532 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5533 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5534 @dots{}
5535 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5536 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5537 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5538 @dots{}
5539@}
5540@end group
5541@end example
5542
5543@node VERSION
5544@section VERSION Command
5545@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5546@cindex symbol versions
5547@cindex version script
5548@cindex versions of symbols
5549The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5550only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5551symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5552a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5553shared library.
5554
5555You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5556you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5557also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5558
5559The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5560@smallexample
5561VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5562@end smallexample
5563
5564The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5565Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5566version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5567version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5568version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5569scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5570library.
5571
5572The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5573examples.
5574
5575@smallexample
5576VERS_1.1 @{
5577 global:
5578 foo1;
5579 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5580 old*;
5581 original*;
5582 new*;
252b5132
RH
5583@};
5584
5585VERS_1.2 @{
5586 foo2;
5587@} VERS_1.1;
5588
5589VERS_2.0 @{
5590 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5591 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5592 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5593 "f(int, double)";
5594 @};
252b5132
RH
5595@} VERS_1.2;
5596@end smallexample
5597
5598This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5599version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5600The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5601a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5602of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5603symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5604is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5605in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5606However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5607name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5608
5609Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5610depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5611to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5612
5613Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5614depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5615and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5616
5617When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5618specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5619unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5620unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5621somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5622wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5623wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5624set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5625ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5626
5627The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5628they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5629could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5630However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5631
0f6bf451 5632Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5633in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5634symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5635won't.
5636
5637@smallexample
7c9c73be 5638@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5639@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5640
252b5132
RH
5641When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5642symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5643requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5644shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5645loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5646linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5647application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5648way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5649all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5650search for each symbol reference.
5651
5652The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5653doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5654that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5655functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5656the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5657required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5658that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5659versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5660the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5661
5662There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5663first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5664source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5665script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5666maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5667@smallexample
5668__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5669@end smallexample
5670@noindent
5671in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5672be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5673The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5674@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5675takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5676
5677The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5678function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5679an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5680version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5681linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5682
5683To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5684source file. Here is an example:
5685
5686@smallexample
5687__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5688__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5689__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5690__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5691@end smallexample
5692
5693In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5694unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5695example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5696@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5697
5698When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5699some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5700this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5701@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5702declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5703you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5704
5705If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5706within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5707(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5708specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5709
cb840a31
L
5710You can also specify the language in the version script:
5711
5712@smallexample
5713VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5714@end smallexample
5715
c0065db7 5716The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5717The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5718demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5719patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5720@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5721
86043bbb
MM
5722Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5723described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5724or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5725the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5726whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5727cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5728might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5729should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5730expect when you upgrade.
5731
252b5132
RH
5732@node Expressions
5733@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5734@cindex expressions
5735@cindex arithmetic
5736The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5737that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5738expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5739host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5740
5741You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5742
5743The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5744expressions.
5745
5746@menu
5747* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5748* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5749* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5750* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5751* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5752* Operators:: Operators
5753* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5754* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5755* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5756@end menu
5757
5758@node Constants
5759@subsection Constants
5760@cindex integer notation
5761@cindex constants in linker scripts
5762All constants are integers.
5763
5764As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5765octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5766hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5767@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5768@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5769value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5770
5771@cindex scaled integers
5772@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5773@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5774@cindex suffixes for integers
5775@cindex integer suffixes
5776In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5777constant by
5778@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5779@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5780@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5781@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5782@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5783@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5784@tex
5785${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5786@end tex
5787@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5788respectively. For example, the following
5789all refer to the same quantity:
5790
252b5132 5791@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5792_fourk_1 = 4K;
5793_fourk_2 = 4096;
5794_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5795_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5796@end smallexample
5797
8a308ae8
NC
5798Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5799conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5800
0c71d759
NC
5801@node Symbolic Constants
5802@subsection Symbolic Constants
5803@cindex symbolic constants
5804@kindex CONSTANT
5805It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5806the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5807
5808@table @code
5809@item MAXPAGESIZE
5810@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5811The target's maximum page size.
5812
5813@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5814@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5815The target's default page size.
5816@end table
5817
5818So for example:
5819
5820@smallexample
9d5777a3 5821 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5822@end smallexample
5823
5824will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5825supported by the target.
5826
252b5132
RH
5827@node Symbols
5828@subsection Symbol Names
5829@cindex symbol names
5830@cindex names
5831@cindex quoted symbol names
5832@kindex "
5833Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5834and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5835Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5836specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5837keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5838@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5839"SECTION" = 9;
5840"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5841@end smallexample
5842
5843Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5844to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5845whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5846
ecca9871
L
5847@node Orphan Sections
5848@subsection Orphan Sections
5849@cindex orphan
5850Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5851are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5852script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
a87ded7b
AB
5853output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
5854in which to place the orphaned input section.
5855
5856If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
5857an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
5858placed at the end of that output section.
5859
5860If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
5861sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
5862name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
5863orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
5864one new output section.
5865
5866If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
5867then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
e299b355
AM
5868in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
5869linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
5870attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
5871sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
5872support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
ecca9871 5873
c005eb9e
AB
5874The command line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5875(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}) can be used to control which
5876output sections an orphan is placed in.
5877
252b5132
RH
5878@node Location Counter
5879@subsection The Location Counter
5880@kindex .
5881@cindex dot
5882@cindex location counter
5883@cindex current output location
5884The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5885current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5886location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5887within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5888anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5889
5890@cindex holes
5891Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5892moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5893location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5894and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5895doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5896
5897@smallexample
5898SECTIONS
5899@{
5900 output :
5901 @{
5902 file1(.text)
5903 . = . + 1000;
5904 file2(.text)
5905 . += 1000;
5906 file3(.text)
563e308f 5907 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5908@}
5909@end smallexample
5910@noindent
5911In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5912located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5913followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5914@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5915@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5916specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5917
5c6bbab8
NC
5918@cindex dot inside sections
5919Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5920current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5921statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5922absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5923however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5924not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5925
5926@smallexample
5927SECTIONS
5928@{
5929 . = 0x100
5930 .text: @{
5931 *(.text)
5932 . = 0x200
5933 @}
5934 . = 0x500
5935 .data: @{
5936 *(.data)
5937 . += 0x600
5938 @}
5939@}
5940@end smallexample
5941
5942The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5943and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5944the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5945much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5946move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5947and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5948the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5949the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5950
b5666f2f
AM
5951@cindex dot outside sections
5952Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5953output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5954needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5955
5956@smallexample
5957SECTIONS
5958@{
5959 start_of_text = . ;
5960 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5961 end_of_text = . ;
5962
5963 start_of_data = . ;
5964 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5965 end_of_data = . ;
5966@}
5967@end smallexample
5968
5969If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5970not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5971between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5972should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5973blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5974the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5975sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5976statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5977special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5978place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5979as follows:
5980
5981@smallexample
5982SECTIONS
5983@{
5984 start_of_text = . ;
5985 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5986 end_of_text = . ;
5987
5988 start_of_data = . ;
5989 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5990 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5991 end_of_data = . ;
5992@}
5993@end smallexample
5994
5995This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5996@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5997placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5998assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5999a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
6000section. So you could write:
6001
6002@smallexample
6003SECTIONS
6004@{
6005 start_of_text = . ;
6006 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6007 end_of_text = . ;
6008
6009 . = . ;
6010 start_of_data = . ;
6011 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6012 end_of_data = . ;
6013@}
6014@end smallexample
6015
6016Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
6017@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
6018
252b5132
RH
6019@need 2000
6020@node Operators
6021@subsection Operators
6022@cindex operators for arithmetic
6023@cindex arithmetic operators
6024@cindex precedence in expressions
6025The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
6026the standard bindings and precedence levels:
6027@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6028@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6029@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6030@smallexample
6031precedence associativity Operators Notes
6032(highest)
60331 left ! - ~ (1)
60342 left * / %
60353 left + -
60364 left >> <<
60375 left == != > < <= >=
60386 left &
60397 left |
60408 left &&
60419 left ||
604210 right ? :
604311 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
6044(lowest)
6045@end smallexample
6046Notes:
a1ab1d2a 6047(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
6048(2) @xref{Assignments}.
6049@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6050@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6051@tex
6052\vskip \baselineskip
6053%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
6054\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6055\hrule
6056\halign
6057{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6058height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6059&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6060height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6061\noalign{\hrule}
6062height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6063&highest&&&&&\cr
6064% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 6065&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
6066&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6067&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
6068&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
6069&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6070&6&&left&&\&&\cr
6071&7&&left&&|&\cr
6072&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6073&9&&left&&||&\cr
6074&10&&right&&? :&\cr
6075&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6076&lowest&&&&&\cr
6077height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6078\hrule}
6079@end tex
6080@iftex
6081{
6082@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6083@dag@quad Prefix operators.
6084@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6085}
6086@end iftex
6087@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6088
6089@node Evaluation
6090@subsection Evaluation
6091@cindex lazy evaluation
6092@cindex expression evaluation order
6093The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6094an expression when absolutely necessary.
6095
6096The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6097address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6098regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6099as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6100
6101However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6102until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6103other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6104for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6105
6106The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6107assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6108allocation.
6109
6110Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6111@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6112
6113If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6114available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6115following
6116@smallexample
6117@group
6118SECTIONS
6119 @{
a1ab1d2a 6120 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
6121 @{ *(.text) @}
6122 @}
6123@end group
6124@end smallexample
6125@noindent
6126will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6127address}.
6128
6129@node Expression Section
6130@subsection The Section of an Expression
6131@cindex expression sections
6132@cindex absolute expressions
6133@cindex relative expressions
6134@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6135@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6136@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
6137Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6138relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6139using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6140value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6141symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6142operations.
6143
abf4be64
AM
6144Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6145section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6146address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6147@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6148functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
6149One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6150(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
6151differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6152versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6153section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6154Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
6155absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6156given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6157everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
6158
6159In the following simple example,
252b5132 6160
7542af2a
AM
6161@smallexample
6162@group
6163SECTIONS
6164 @{
6165 . = 0x100;
6166 __executable_start = 0x100;
6167 .data :
6168 @{
6169 . = 0x10;
6170 __data_start = 0x10;
6171 *(.data)
6172 @}
6173 @dots{}
6174 @}
6175@end group
6176@end smallexample
252b5132 6177
7542af2a
AM
6178both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6179address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6180@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6181section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 6182
5c3049d2
AM
6183For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6184addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
6185
6186@itemize @bullet
6187@item
c05f749e
AM
6188Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6189operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6190absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6191@item
7542af2a
AM
6192Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6193relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6194and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6195@item
c05f749e
AM
6196Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6197in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6198address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6199before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
6200@end itemize
6201
6202The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6203
6204@itemize @bullet
6205@item
6206An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6207@item
6208The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6209@item
9bc8bb33 6210The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 6211relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
94b41882
AM
6212(after above conversions) is also a number when
6213@code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6214but an absolute address otherwise.
9bc8bb33
AM
6215@item
6216The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6217relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6218section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
6219@item
6220The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6221conversions) is an absolute address.
6222@end itemize
252b5132
RH
6223
6224You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6225to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6226create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6227section @samp{.data}:
6228@smallexample
6229SECTIONS
6230 @{
6231 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6232 @}
6233@end smallexample
6234@noindent
6235If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6236@samp{.data} section.
6237
7542af2a
AM
6238Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6239particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6240
252b5132
RH
6241@node Builtin Functions
6242@subsection Builtin Functions
6243@cindex functions in expressions
6244The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6245use in linker script expressions.
6246
6247@table @code
6248@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6249@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6250@cindex expression, absolute
6251Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6252of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6253value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6254normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6255
6256@item ADDR(@var{section})
6257@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6258@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 6259Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 6260script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
6261the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6262@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6263@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6264the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
6265@smallexample
6266@group
6267SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6268 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 6269 @{
252b5132
RH
6270 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6271 @dots{}
6272 @}
6273 .output :
6274 @{
6275 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6276 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6277 @}
6278@dots{} @}
6279@end group
6280@end smallexample
6281
876f4090
NS
6282@item ALIGN(@var{align})
6283@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6284@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6285@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
6286@cindex round up location counter
6287@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
6288@cindex round up expression
6289@cindex align expression
6290Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6291to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6292doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6293arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6294expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
e0a3af22 6295equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
876f4090
NS
6296
6297Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6298next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6299variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6300input sections:
252b5132
RH
6301@smallexample
6302@group
6303SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6304 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6305 *(.data)
6306 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6307 @}
6308@dots{} @}
6309@end group
6310@end smallexample
6311@noindent
6312The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6313a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6314a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6315of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6316
6317The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6318
362c1d1a
NS
6319@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6320@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6321@cindex section alignment
6322Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6323been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6324evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6325the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6326value in that section.
6327@smallexample
6328@group
6329SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6330 .output @{
6331 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6332 @dots{}
6333 @}
6334@dots{} @}
6335@end group
6336@end smallexample
6337
252b5132
RH
6338@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6339@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6340This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6341scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6342section.
6343
2d20f7bf
JJ
6344@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6345@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6346This is equivalent to either
6347@smallexample
6348(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6349@end smallexample
6350or
6351@smallexample
fe6052e1
AM
6352(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6353 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
2d20f7bf
JJ
6354@end smallexample
6355@noindent
6356depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6357for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6358@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6359If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6360memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6361bytes in the on-disk file.
6362
6363This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6364any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6365@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6366be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
6367working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
6368
6369@noindent
6370Example:
6371@smallexample
6372 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6373@end smallexample
6374
6375@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6376@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6377This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6378evaluation purposes.
6379
6380@smallexample
6381 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6382@end smallexample
6383
a4f5ad88
JJ
6384@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6385@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6386This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 6387@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6388When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6389does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6390@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
6391boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
6392it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
6393@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6394padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6395section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6396
6397@smallexample
6398 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6399@end smallexample
6400
252b5132
RH
6401@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6402@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6403@cindex symbol defaults
6404Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
6405defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6406return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
6407default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6408shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6409the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6410existed, its value is preserved:
6411
6412@smallexample
6413@group
6414SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6415 .text : @{
6416 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6417 @dots{}
6418 @}
6419 @dots{}
6420@}
6421@end group
6422@end smallexample
6423
3ec57632
NC
6424@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6425@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6426Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6427
252b5132
RH
6428@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6429@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6430@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 6431Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
6432Section LMA}).
6433
2e53f7d6
NC
6434@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6435@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6436Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6437@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6438
252b5132
RH
6439@kindex MAX
6440@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6441Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6442
6443@kindex MIN
6444@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6445Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6446
6447@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6448@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6449@cindex unallocated address, next
6450Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6451This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6452use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6453output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6454
3ec57632
NC
6455@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6456@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6457Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6458
ba916c8a
MM
6459@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6460@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6461Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6462value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6463@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6464will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6465can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6466``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6467name.
6468
252b5132
RH
6469@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6470@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6471@cindex section size
6472Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6473been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6474evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6475@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6476@smallexample
6477@group
6478SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6479 .output @{
6480 .start = . ;
6481 @dots{}
6482 .end = . ;
6483 @}
6484 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6485 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6486@dots{} @}
6487@end group
6488@end smallexample
6489
6490@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6491@itemx sizeof_headers
6492@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6493@cindex header size
6494Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6495information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6496this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6497choose, to facilitate paging.
6498
6499@cindex not enough room for program headers
6500@cindex program headers, not enough room
6501When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6502@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6503number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6504addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6505additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6506room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6507the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6508script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6509you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6510command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6511@end table
6512
6513@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6514@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6515@cindex implicit linker scripts
6516If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6517an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6518linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6519linker will report an error.
6520
6521An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6522
6523Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6524assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6525commands.
6526
6527Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6528at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6529read. This can affect archive searching.
6530
6531@ifset GENERIC
6532@node Machine Dependent
6533@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6534
6535@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6536@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6537sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6538functionality are not listed.
6539
6540@menu
36f63dca
NC
6541@ifset H8300
6542* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6543@end ifset
6544@ifset I960
6545* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6546@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6547@ifset M68HC11
6548* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6549@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6550@ifset ARM
6551* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6552@end ifset
6553@ifset HPPA
6554* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6555@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6556@ifset M68K
6557* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6558@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6559@ifset MIPS
6560* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6561@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6562@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6563* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6564@end ifset
2469cfa2 6565@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6566* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6567@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6568@ifset NDS32
6569* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6570@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6571@ifset NIOSII
6572* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6573@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6574@ifset POWERPC
6575* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6576@end ifset
6577@ifset POWERPC64
6578* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6579@end ifset
b4cbbe8f
AK
6580@ifset S/390
6581* S/390 ELF:: @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
6582@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6583@ifset SPU
6584* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6585@end ifset
74459f0e 6586@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6587* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6588@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6589@ifset WIN32
6590* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6591@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6592@ifset XTENSA
6593* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6594@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6595@end menu
6596@end ifset
6597
252b5132
RH
6598@ifset H8300
6599@ifclear GENERIC
6600@raisesections
6601@end ifclear
6602
6603@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6604@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6605
6606@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6607For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6608you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6609
6610@table @emph
6611@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6612@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6613@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6614targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6615program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6616respectively.
6617
6618@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6619@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6620@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6621@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6622sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6623page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6624(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6625@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6626top page of memory).
1502569c 6627
81f5558e
NC
6628@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6629indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6630displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6631the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6632@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6633whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6634range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6635
1502569c 6636@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6637@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6638biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6639which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6640page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6641(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6642@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6643the top page of memory).
6644
6645@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6646@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
664732 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6648changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6649(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6650@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6651the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6652@end table
6653
6654@ifclear GENERIC
6655@lowersections
6656@end ifclear
6657@end ifset
6658
36f63dca 6659@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6660@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6661@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6662@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6663@node Renesas
6664@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6665
c2dcd04e
NC
6666@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6667H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6668options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6669@end ifset
6670@end ifclear
6671
6672@ifset I960
6673@ifclear GENERIC
6674@raisesections
6675@end ifclear
6676
6677@node i960
6678@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6679
6680@cindex i960 support
6681
6682You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6683specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6684family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6685incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6686linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6687libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6688search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6689
6690For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6691well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6692paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6693the names
6694
6695@smallexample
6696@group
6697try
6698libtry.a
6699tryca
6700libtryca.a
6701@end group
6702@end smallexample
6703
6704@noindent
6705The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6706two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6707
6708You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6709the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6710use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6711specifies a library.
6712
6713@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6714@cindex relaxing on i960
6715@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6716you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6717@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6718them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6719instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6720instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6721target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6722not itself call any subroutines).
6723
6724@ifclear GENERIC
6725@lowersections
6726@end ifclear
6727@end ifset
6728
6729@ifset ARM
6730@ifclear GENERIC
6731@raisesections
6732@end ifclear
6733
93fd0973
SC
6734@ifset M68HC11
6735@ifclear GENERIC
6736@raisesections
6737@end ifclear
6738
6739@node M68HC11/68HC12
6740@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6741
6742@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6743
6744@subsection Linker Relaxation
6745
6746For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6747optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6748
6749@table @emph
6750@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6751@item relaxing address modes
6752@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6753targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6754program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6755respectively.
6756
6757@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6758transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6759page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6760
6761@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6762When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6763of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6764addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6765@code{bset} instructions.
6766
6767@end table
6768
6769@subsection Trampoline Generation
6770
6771@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6772@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6773For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6774call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6775will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6776trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6777case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6778point to the function trampoline.
6779
6780@ifclear GENERIC
6781@lowersections
6782@end ifclear
6783@end ifset
6784
36f63dca 6785@node ARM
3674e28a 6786@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6787
6788@cindex ARM interworking support
6789@kindex --support-old-code
6790For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6791between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6792been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6793line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6794libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6795option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6796given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6797which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6798the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6799non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6800
6801@cindex thumb entry point
6802@cindex entry point, thumb
6803@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6804The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6805@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6806But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6807branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6808executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6809
ce11ba6c
KT
6810@cindex PE import table prefixing
6811@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6812The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6813the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6814element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6815import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6816
e489d0ae
PB
6817@cindex BE8
6818@kindex --be8
6819The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
080bb7bb
NC
6820executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6821objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6822option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6823little-endian code.
e489d0ae 6824
3674e28a
PB
6825@cindex TARGET1
6826@kindex --target1-rel
6827@kindex --target1-abs
6828The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6829@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6830or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6831and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6832
6833@cindex TARGET2
6834@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6835The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6836@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6837meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6838@table @samp
6839@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6840@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6841@item abs
6842@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6843@item got-rel
6844@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6845@end table
6846
319850b4
JB
6847@cindex FIX_V4BX
6848@kindex --fix-v4bx
6849The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6850specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6851interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6852also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6853
6854In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6855linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6856@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6857
6858In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6859relocations are ignored.
6860
845b51d6
PB
6861@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6862@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6863Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6864relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6865
6866@smallexample
6867TST rM, #1
6868MOVEQ PC, rM
6869BX Rn
6870@end smallexample
6871
6872This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6873and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6874condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6875
33bfe774
JB
6876@cindex USE_BLX
6877@kindex --use-blx
6878The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6879BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6880situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6881code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6882each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6883
6884This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6885specify it if you are using that target.
6886
c6dd86c6
JB
6887@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6888@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6889The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6890bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6891instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6892to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6893the support code can read the intended values.
6894
6895The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6896intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6897and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6898intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6899full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6900you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6901
6902If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6903enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6904@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6905mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6906vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6907@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6908
6909If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6910potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6911such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6912first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6913instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6914the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6915are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6916
2de70689
MGD
6917@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6918@kindex --fix-arm1176
6919@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6920The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6921in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6922are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6923unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6924
9d5777a3 6925Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6926Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6927http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6928
a504d23a
LA
6929@cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6930@kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6931
6932The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6933workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6934the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6935off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6936the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6937core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6938integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6939VPOP. Stores are not affected.
6940
6941The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6942necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
6943
6944The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
6945@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
6946STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
6947linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
6948@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
6949
6950If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6951potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6952such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
6953replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
6954branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
6955then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
6956
6957The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
6958the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
6959
6960The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
6961they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
6962there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6963occurs.
6964
6965The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
6966PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
6967large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
6968cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6969occurs.
6970
bf21ed78
MS
6971@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6972@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6973The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6974warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6975enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6976linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6977using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6978not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6979
6980@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6981@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6982The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6983warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6984@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6985linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6986using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6987
726150b7
NC
6988@cindex PIC_VENEER
6989@kindex --pic-veneer
6990The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6991ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6992is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6993@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6994
6995@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6996@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6997The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6998code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6999perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
7000placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
7001controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
7002The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 7003duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
7004group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
7005code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
7006where they should be placed.
7007
7008The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
7009@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 7010placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
7011branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
7012placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
7013value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
7014exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
7015A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
7016linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
7017from the input sections.
7018
7019The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
7020@samp{N = +1}.
7021
1a51c1a4
NC
7022Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
7023only, because it relies on object files properties not present
7024otherwise.
7025
1db37fe6
YG
7026@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
7027@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
7028@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
7029The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
7030
7031The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
7032
68fcca92
JW
7033@cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
7034@kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
7035@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
7036The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
7037
7038Please contact ARM for further details.
7039
1db37fe6
YG
7040@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
7041@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
7042@cindex Merging exidx entries
7043The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
7044
7045@kindex --long-plt
7046@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
7047The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
7048which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
7049entries which only support 512Mb of code.
7050
1f56df9d
JW
7051@kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
7052@cindex AArch64 rela addend
7053The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
7054link-time values for dynamic relocations.
7055
4ba2ef8f
TP
7056@cindex Placement of SG veneers
7057All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
7058Its start address must be set, either with the command line option
7059@samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
7060veneers in memory.
7061
54ddd295
TP
7062@kindex --cmse-implib
7063@cindex Secure gateway import library
7064The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7065specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7066secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7067executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7068
0955507f
TP
7069@kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7070@cindex Input import library
7071The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7072must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7073given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7074in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7075@samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7076library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7077library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7078for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7079specified.
7080
36f63dca
NC
7081@ifclear GENERIC
7082@lowersections
7083@end ifclear
7084@end ifset
7085
7086@ifset HPPA
7087@ifclear GENERIC
7088@raisesections
7089@end ifclear
7090
7091@node HPPA ELF32
7092@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7093@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7094@kindex --multi-subspace
7095When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7096import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7097The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7098stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7099multiple sub-spaces.
7100
7101@cindex HPPA stub grouping
7102@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7103Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7104stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7105@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7106sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7107a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7108the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7109conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7110prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7111A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7112branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7113@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7114@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7115detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7116positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7117
7118Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7119single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7120create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7121large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7122
7123@ifclear GENERIC
7124@lowersections
7125@end ifclear
7126@end ifset
7127
7fb9f789
NC
7128@ifset M68K
7129@ifclear GENERIC
7130@raisesections
7131@end ifclear
7132
7133@node M68K
7134@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7135
7136@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7137@kindex --got=@var{type}
7138The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7139The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7140@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7141the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7142@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7143entries only at non-negative offsets.
7144@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7145entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7146support such GOTs.
7147@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7148output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7149file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7150files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7151
7152@ifclear GENERIC
7153@lowersections
7154@end ifclear
7155@end ifset
7156
833794fc
MR
7157@ifset MIPS
7158@ifclear GENERIC
7159@raisesections
7160@end ifclear
7161
7162@node MIPS
7163@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7164
7165@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7166@kindex --insn32
7167@kindex --no-insn32
7168The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7169microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7170in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7171used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7172or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7173including 16-bit ones where possible.
7174
8b10b0b3
MR
7175@cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7176@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7177@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7178The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7179control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7180@samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7181relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7182calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7183relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7184instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7185or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7186the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7187
833794fc
MR
7188@ifclear GENERIC
7189@lowersections
7190@end ifclear
7191@end ifset
7192
36f63dca
NC
7193@ifset MMIX
7194@ifclear GENERIC
7195@raisesections
7196@end ifclear
7197
7198@node MMIX
7199@section @code{ld} and MMIX
7200For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7201@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7202understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7203can translate between the two formats.
7204
7205There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7206Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7207registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7208equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7209@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7210global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7211this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7212symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7213
7a2de473
HPN
7214Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7215@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7216The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7217of a section.
36f63dca
NC
7218
7219Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7220are left out from an mmo file.
7221
7222@ifclear GENERIC
7223@lowersections
7224@end ifclear
7225@end ifset
7226
7227@ifset MSP430
7228@ifclear GENERIC
7229@raisesections
7230@end ifclear
7231
7232@node MSP430
7233@section @code{ld} and MSP430
7234For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7235will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7236just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7237
7238@cindex MSP430 extra sections
7239The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7240
7241@table @code
7242@item @samp{.vectors}
7243Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7244
7245@item @samp{.bootloader}
7246Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7247in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7248
7249@item @samp{.infomem}
7250Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7251this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7252
c0065db7 7253@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
7254This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7255in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7256
7257@item @samp{.noinit}
7258Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7259
c0065db7 7260The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
7261@end table
7262
7ef3addb
JL
7263@table @option
7264@cindex MSP430 Options
7265@kindex --code-region
7266@item --code-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7267This will transform .text* sections to [either,lower,upper].text* sections. The
7268argument passed to GCC for -mcode-region is propagated to the linker
7269using this option.
7270
7271@kindex --data-region
7272@item --data-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7273This will transform .data*, .bss* and .rodata* sections to
7274[either,lower,upper].[data,bss,rodata]* sections. The argument passed to GCC
7275for -mdata-region is propagated to the linker using this option.
7276
7277@kindex --disable-sec-transformation
7278@item --disable-sec-transformation
7279Prevent the transformation of sections as specified by the @code{--code-region}
7280and @code{--data-region} options.
7281This is useful if you are compiling and linking using a single call to the GCC
7282wrapper, and want to compile the source files using -m[code,data]-region but
7283not transform the sections for prebuilt libraries and objects.
7284@end table
7285
36f63dca
NC
7286@ifclear GENERIC
7287@lowersections
7288@end ifclear
7289@end ifset
7290
35c08157
KLC
7291@ifset NDS32
7292@ifclear GENERIC
7293@raisesections
7294@end ifclear
7295
7296@node NDS32
7297@section @code{ld} and NDS32
7298@kindex relaxing on NDS32
7299For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7300relaxes objects according to these options.
7301
7302@table @code
7303@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7304Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7305
7306@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7307Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7308
7309@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7310Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7311
7312@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7313Export the EX9 table after linking.
7314
7315@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7316Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7317
7318@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7319Update the existing EX9 table.
7320
7321@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7322Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7323
7324@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7325Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7326
7327@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7328Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7329
7330@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7331Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7332@end table
7333
7334@ifclear GENERIC
7335@lowersections
7336@end ifclear
7337@end ifset
7338
78058a5e
SL
7339@ifset NIOSII
7340@ifclear GENERIC
7341@raisesections
7342@end ifclear
7343
7344@node Nios II
7345@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7346@cindex Nios II call relaxation
7347@kindex --relax on Nios II
7348
7349Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7350transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7351which may result in @command{ld} giving
7352@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7353The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7354trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7355outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7356trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7357be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7358larger than 256MB.
7359
7360The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7361is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7362@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7363locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7364source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7365register as a temporary.
7366
7367Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7368relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7369option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7370
7371@ifclear GENERIC
7372@lowersections
7373@end ifclear
7374@end ifset
7375
2a60a7a8
AM
7376@ifset POWERPC
7377@ifclear GENERIC
7378@raisesections
7379@end ifclear
7380
7381@node PowerPC ELF32
7382@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7383@cindex PowerPC long branches
7384@kindex --relax on PowerPC
7385Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7386displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7387@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7388@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7389the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7390section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
7391section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7392@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7393both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7394considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
7395
7396@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7397@table @option
7398@cindex PowerPC PLT
7399@kindex --bss-plt
7400@item --bss-plt
7401Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7402generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7403the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7404writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7405@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7406PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7407compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7408BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7409
016687f8
AM
7410@kindex --secure-plt
7411@item --secure-plt
7412@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7413@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7414when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7415layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7416style BSS PLT.
7417
2a60a7a8
AM
7418@cindex PowerPC GOT
7419@kindex --sdata-got
7420@item --sdata-got
7421The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7422sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7423@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7424section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7425@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7426@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7427@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7428@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7429PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7430pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7431GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7432really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7433
7434@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7435@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7436@item --emit-stub-syms
7437This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7438symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7439
7440@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7441@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7442@item --no-tls-optimize
7443PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7444sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7445disable the optimization.
7446@end table
7447
7448@ifclear GENERIC
7449@lowersections
7450@end ifclear
7451@end ifset
7452
7453@ifset POWERPC64
7454@ifclear GENERIC
7455@raisesections
7456@end ifclear
7457
7458@node PowerPC64 ELF64
7459@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7460
7461@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7462@table @option
7463@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7464@kindex --stub-group-size
7465@item --stub-group-size
7466Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7467by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7468@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7469sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7470a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7471the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7472conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7473prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7474A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7475branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7476@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7477@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7478detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7479positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7480
7481Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7482single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7483create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7484large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7485
7486@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7487@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7488@item --emit-stub-syms
7489This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7490symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7491
7492@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7493@kindex --dotsyms
7494@kindex --no-dotsyms
95421fb9
AM
7495@item --dotsyms
7496@itemx --no-dotsyms
2a60a7a8
AM
7497These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7498in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7499function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7500code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7501properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7502to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7503@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7504dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7505feature.
7506
7ae4ea7d
AM
7507@cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7508@kindex --save-restore-funcs
7509@kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
95421fb9
AM
7510@item --save-restore-funcs
7511@itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7ae4ea7d
AM
7512These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7513provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7514@samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7515function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7516link.
7517
2a60a7a8
AM
7518@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7519@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7520@item --no-tls-optimize
7521PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7522sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7523disable the optimization.
7524
7c9cf415
AM
7525@cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7526@kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7527@kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
95421fb9
AM
7528@item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7529@itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7c9cf415
AM
7530These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7531stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7532an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7533@code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7534stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7535option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7536Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7537slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7538application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7539normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7540
2a60a7a8
AM
7541@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7542@kindex --no-opd-optimize
7543@item --no-opd-optimize
7544PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7545corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 7546the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
7547Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7548
7549@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7550@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7551@item --non-overlapping-opd
7552Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7553@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7554the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7555entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7556
7557@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7558@kindex --no-toc-optimize
7559@item --no-toc-optimize
7560PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7561entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7562reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7563marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7564marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7565relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7566unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7567reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7568discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7569reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7570code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7571optimization.
7572
7573@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7574@kindex --no-multi-toc
7575@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
7576If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7577@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7578where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
7579entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7580total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7581grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7582TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7583calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7584help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
758564K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7586Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
7587
7588@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7589@kindex --no-toc-sort
7590@item --no-toc-sort
7591By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7592happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7593placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7594with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7595referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7596@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7597results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7598off this feature.
7599
7600@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7601@kindex --plt-align
7602@kindex --no-plt-align
7603@item --plt-align
7604@itemx --no-plt-align
7605Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
e05fa0ba
AM
7606padded so that they don't cross a 32-byte boundary, or to the
7607specified power of two boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. Note
7608that this isn't alignment in the usual sense. By default PLT call
7609stubs are packed tightly.
794e51c0
AM
7610
7611@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7612@kindex --plt-static-chain
7613@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7614@item --plt-static-chain
7615@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7616Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7617chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7618chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7619
7620@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7621@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7622@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7623@item --plt-thread-safe
7624@itemx --no-thread-safe
7625With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7626lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7627another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7628order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7629memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7630barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7631looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7632seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7633default behaviour.
8b5f1ed8
AM
7634
7635@cindex PowerPC64 ELFv2 PLT localentry optimization
7636@kindex --plt-localentry
7637@kindex --no-plt-localentry
7638@item --plt-localentry
7639@itemx --no-localentry
7640ELFv2 functions with localentry:0 are those with a single entry point,
7641ie. global entry == local entry, and that have no requirement on r2
7642(the TOC/GOT pointer) or r12, and guarantee r2 is unchanged on return.
7643Such an external function can be called via the PLT without saving r2
7644or restoring it on return, avoiding a common load-hit-store for small
7645functions. The optimization is attractive, with up to 40% reduction
7646in execution time for a small function, but can result in symbol
d44c746a
AM
7647interposition failures. Also, minor changes in a shared library,
7648including system libraries, can cause a function that was localentry:0
7649to become localentry:8. This will result in a dynamic loader
7650complaint and failure to run. The option is experimental, use with
7651care. @option{--no-plt-localentry} is the default.
2a60a7a8
AM
7652@end table
7653
7654@ifclear GENERIC
7655@lowersections
7656@end ifclear
7657@end ifset
7658
b4cbbe8f
AK
7659@ifset S/390
7660@ifclear GENERIC
7661@raisesections
7662@end ifclear
7663
7664@node S/390 ELF
7665@section @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
7666
7667@cindex S/390 ELF options
7668@table @option
7669
7670@cindex S/390
7671@kindex --s390-pgste
7672@item --s390-pgste
7673This option marks the result file with a @code{PT_S390_PGSTE}
7674segment. The Linux kernel is supposed to allocate 4k page tables for
7675binaries marked that way.
7676@end table
7677
7678@ifclear GENERIC
7679@lowersections
7680@end ifclear
7681@end ifset
7682
49fa1e15
AM
7683@ifset SPU
7684@ifclear GENERIC
7685@raisesections
7686@end ifclear
7687
7688@node SPU ELF
7689@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7690
7691@cindex SPU ELF options
7692@table @option
7693
7694@cindex SPU plugins
7695@kindex --plugin
7696@item --plugin
7697This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7698
7699@cindex SPU overlays
7700@kindex --no-overlays
7701@item --no-overlays
7702Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7703regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7704@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7705turns off all this special overlay handling.
7706
7707@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7708@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7709@item --emit-stub-syms
7710This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7711symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7712
7713@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7714@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7715@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7716This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7717function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7718on calls to non-overlay regions.
7719
7720@cindex SPU local store size
7721@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7722@item --local-store=lo:hi
7723@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7724the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7725range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7726
c0065db7 7727@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7728@kindex --stack-analysis
7729@item --stack-analysis
7730SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7731unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7732under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7733@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7734@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7735determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7736for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7737for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7738for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7739find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7740and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7741under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7742dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7743is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7744and calls will be given.
7745
c0065db7 7746@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7747@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7748@item --emit-stack-syms
7749This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7750in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7751These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7752functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7753functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7754such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7755The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7756@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7757@end table
7758
7759@ifclear GENERIC
7760@lowersections
7761@end ifclear
7762@end ifset
7763
36f63dca
NC
7764@ifset TICOFF
7765@ifclear GENERIC
7766@raisesections
7767@end ifclear
7768
7769@node TI COFF
7770@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7771@cindex TI COFF versions
7772@kindex --format=@var{version}
7773The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7774TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7775also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7776format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7777header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7778
7779@ifclear GENERIC
7780@lowersections
7781@end ifclear
7782@end ifset
7783
2ca22b03
NC
7784@ifset WIN32
7785@ifclear GENERIC
7786@raisesections
7787@end ifclear
7788
7789@node WIN32
7790@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7791
c0065db7 7792This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 7793See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 7794command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7795
7796@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7797@cindex import libraries
7798@item import libraries
69da35b5 7799The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7800libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7801regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7802archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
7803support for creating such libraries provided with the
7804@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7805
c0065db7
RM
7806@item exporting DLL symbols
7807@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7808The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7809
7810@table @emph
7811@item using auto-export functionality
7812@cindex using auto-export functionality
7813By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7814which is controlled by the following command line options:
7815
0a5d968e
NC
7816@itemize
7817@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7818@item --exclude-symbols
7819@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7820@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7821@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7822@end itemize
7823
09e2aba4
DK
7824When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7825(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7826symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7827often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7828private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7829options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7830exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7831final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7832
7833If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7834command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7835if either of the following are true:
7836
7837@itemize
7838@item A DEF file is used.
7839@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7840@end itemize
dc8465bf 7841
c0065db7
RM
7842@item using a DEF file
7843@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7844Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7845an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7846exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7847name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7848command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7849
7850@example
7851gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7852@end example
7853
0a5d968e
NC
7854Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7855@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7856
dc8465bf
NC
7857Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7858
7859@example
4b5bd4e7 7860LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7861
7862EXPORTS
7863foo
7864bar
7865_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7866another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7867var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7868doo = foo == foo2
7869eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7870@end example
dc8465bf 7871
7fcab871 7872This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7873symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7874alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7875by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7876@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7877@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7878export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7879in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7880symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7881
6b31ad16
DS
7882The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7883name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7884the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7885
b45619c0
NC
7886When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7887library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7888@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7889executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7890
7891With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7892specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7893non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7894
7895If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7896or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7897filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7898
4b5bd4e7
DS
7899The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7900
7901@example
7902EXPORTS
7903 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7904 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7905 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7906@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7907
7908Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7909@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7910@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7911@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7912Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7913@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7914string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7915
7916The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7917
7918@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7919will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7920by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7921linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7922library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7923
7924@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7925The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7926the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7927@code{*_imp__foo}).
7928
7929@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7930well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7931read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7932variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7933the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7934extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7935application will behave unexpectedly.
7936
7937@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7938it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7939symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
de194d85 7940API at runtime or by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
4b5bd4e7 7941the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7942
4b5bd4e7
DS
7943See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7944other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7945
7946@cindex creating a DEF file
7947While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7948with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7949
7950@item Using decorations
7951@cindex Using decorations
7952Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7953itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7954declared as:
7955
7956@example
7957__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7958__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7959@end example
7960
7961All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7962any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7963this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7964the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7965
7966Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7967decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7968instead:
7969
7970@example
7971__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7972__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7973@end example
7974
c0065db7
RM
7975This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7976when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7977variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7978code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 7979of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
7980omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7981@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 7982information.
c0065db7 7983@end table
dc8465bf 7984
2ca22b03
NC
7985@cindex automatic data imports
7986@item automatic data imports
7987The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 7988by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 7989compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 7990issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 7991code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7992c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 7993initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 7994decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 7995platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
7996command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7997The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7998suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7999trigger the feature's use.
8000
c0065db7 8001auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
8002additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
8003
c0065db7 8004"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
8005documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
8006
c0065db7
RM
8007The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
8008occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
8009One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
8010below.
8011
8012@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
8013For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
8014object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
8015offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
8016field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
8017in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 8018without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 8019The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
8020references.
8021
c0065db7
RM
8022The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
8023be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
8024themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
8025runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
8026compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
8027support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
8028run without error on an older system.
8029
c0065db7
RM
8030@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
8031enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
8032
8033@cindex direct linking to a dll
8034@item direct linking to a dll
8035The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
8036including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 8037libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 8038traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
8039libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
8040function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
8041though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 8042storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 8043tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
8044large or complex libraries when using import libs.
8045
c0065db7 8046Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 8047@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 8048of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
8049perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
8050select the dll instead of an import library.
8051
2ca22b03 8052
69da35b5
NC
8053For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
8054to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
8055
8056@example
45e948fe
NC
8057libxxx.dll.a
8058xxx.dll.a
8059libxxx.a
8060xxx.lib
69da35b5 8061cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
8062libxxx.dll
8063xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
8064@end example
8065
69da35b5
NC
8066before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
8067
c0065db7
RM
8068(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
8069where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
8070@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
8071file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
8072@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
8073
c0065db7
RM
8074Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
8075@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
8076was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
8077various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
8078could coexist on the same machine.
8079
2ca22b03
NC
8080The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
8081applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 8082libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
8083
8084@example
8085bin/
8086 cygxxx.dll
8087lib/
8088 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 8089 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
8090@end example
8091
c0065db7
RM
8092Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
8093done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
8094
80951. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
8096@example
8097gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8098@end example
2ca22b03 8099
69da35b5
NC
8100However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
8101(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
8102@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
8103not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
8104
2ca22b03
NC
81052. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
8106directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
8107should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
8108making the app/dll.
8109
8110@example
8111ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 8112@end example
2ca22b03
NC
8113
8114Then you can link without any make environment changes.
8115
8116@example
8117gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8118@end example
69da35b5
NC
8119
8120This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
8121perfectly legal
8122
8123@example
8124bin/
8125 cygxxx-5.dll
8126lib/
c0065db7 8127 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
8128@end example
8129
dc8465bf 8130Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
8131even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8132@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8133
8134Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 8135wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
8136
81371. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8138work with auto-imported data.
8139
dc8465bf
NC
81402. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8141import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8142symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8143for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8144possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 8145
45e948fe
NC
81463. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8147critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8148in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8149stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8150
69da35b5 8151So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
8152true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8153a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8154binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
8155massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8156requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8157will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 8158
c0065db7 8159@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 8160@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
8161@item adding additional names
8162Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
8163A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8164exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8165when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 8166import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 8167
c0065db7 8168@example
dc8465bf
NC
8169LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8170
8171EXPORTS
c0065db7 8172foo
dc8465bf 8173_foo = foo
c0065db7 8174@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8175
8176The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8177
8178Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8179source code using the "weak" attribute:
8180
c0065db7
RM
8181@example
8182void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 8183void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 8184@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8185
8186See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8187symbols.
8188
8189@item renaming symbols
8190Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 8191kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
8192@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8193DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 8194created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 8195
c0065db7 8196@example
dc8465bf
NC
8197LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8198
8199EXPORTS
8200_foo = foo
c0065db7 8201@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8202
8203The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8204@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 8205@end table
dc8465bf 8206
0a5d968e 8207Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 8208unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 8209If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
8210@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8211that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8212@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8213renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8214to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8215the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8216In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 8217which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
8218
8219@cindex weak externals
8220@item weak externals
8221The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8222weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8223defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8224are three variants of weak externals:
8225@itemize
8226@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8227called lazy externals.
8228@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8229This form is not presently implemented.
8230@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8231implemented.
8232@end itemize
8233As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8234are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8235uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
8236
8237@cindex aligned common symbols
8238@item aligned common symbols
8239As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8240desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8241the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8242carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8243by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8244tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8245but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8246warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 8247
2ca22b03
NC
8248@end table
8249
8250@ifclear GENERIC
8251@lowersections
8252@end ifclear
8253@end ifset
8254
e0001a05
NC
8255@ifset XTENSA
8256@ifclear GENERIC
8257@raisesections
8258@end ifclear
8259
8260@node Xtensa
8261@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8262
8263@cindex Xtensa processors
8264The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8265@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8266specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8267keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8268example, with the command:
8269
8270@smallexample
8271SECTIONS
8272@{
8273 .text : @{
8274 *(.literal .text)
8275 @}
8276@}
8277@end smallexample
8278
8279@noindent
8280@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8281and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8282literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8283interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8284group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8285files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8286and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 8287
43cd72b9 8288@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 8289@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
8290Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8291provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8292is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8293literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8294will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8295location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8296the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8297unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8298@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8299range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8300
8301For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8302to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8303instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8304instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8305instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8306@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8307hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8308By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8309switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8310density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8311instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8312performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8313linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8314a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8315
8316The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8317control the linker:
8318
8319@cindex Xtensa options
8320@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
8321@item --size-opt
8322When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8323more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8324no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8325alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8326preserve the correctness of the code.
8327@end table
e0001a05
NC
8328
8329@ifclear GENERIC
8330@lowersections
8331@end ifclear
8332@end ifset
8333
252b5132
RH
8334@ifclear SingleFormat
8335@node BFD
8336@chapter BFD
8337
8338@cindex back end
8339@cindex object file management
8340@cindex object formats available
8341@kindex objdump -i
8342The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8343These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8344object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8345format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8346it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8347associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8348object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8349(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8350list all the formats available for your configuration.
8351
8352@cindex BFD requirements
8353@cindex requirements for BFD
8354As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8355several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8356BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8357formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8358been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8359BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8360may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8361
8362One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8363mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8364useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8365conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8366
8367@menu
8368* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8369@end menu
8370
8371@node BFD outline
36f63dca 8372@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
8373@cindex opening object files
8374@include bfdsumm.texi
8375@end ifclear
8376
8377@node Reporting Bugs
8378@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
8379@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8380@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 8381
ff5dcc92 8382Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
8383
8384Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8385it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 8386to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 8387work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 8388@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8389
8390In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8391information that enables us to fix the bug.
8392
8393@menu
8394* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8395* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8396@end menu
8397
8398@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 8399@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
8400@cindex bug criteria
8401
8402If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8403
8404@itemize @bullet
8405@cindex fatal signal
8406@cindex linker crash
8407@cindex crash of linker
8408@item
8409If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 8410@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
8411
8412@cindex error on valid input
8413@item
ff5dcc92 8414If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
8415
8416@cindex invalid input
8417@item
ff5dcc92 8418If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
8419may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8420object files are correct.
8421
8422@item
8423If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 8424improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
8425@end itemize
8426
8427@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 8428@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 8429@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 8430@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
8431
8432A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 8433products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
8434recommend you contact that organization first.
8435
8436You can find contact information for many support companies and
8437individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8438distribution.
8439
ad22bfe8 8440@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 8441Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
8442@value{BUGURL}.
8443@end ifset
252b5132
RH
8444
8445The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8446@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8447fact or leave it out, state it!
8448
8449Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8450problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
8451assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8452matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8453the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8454location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8455were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8456into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8457specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 8458and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
8459
8460Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8461the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8462on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
8463
8464Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
8465bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8466respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8467You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
8468
8469To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8470
8471@itemize @bullet
8472@item
ff5dcc92 8473The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
8474the @samp{--version} argument.
8475
8476Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 8477the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8478
8479@item
ff5dcc92 8480Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
8481patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8482
8483@item
8484The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8485version number.
8486
8487@item
ff5dcc92 8488What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
8489``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8490
8491@item
8492The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8493observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8494list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8495sufficient.
8496
8497If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8498and then we might not encounter the bug.
8499
8500@item
8501A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
8502bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8503provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8504bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8505state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8506requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8507we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8508attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
8509
8510If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8511@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8512object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8513@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8514how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8515
8516@item
8517A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8518incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8519
ff5dcc92 8520Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
8521will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8522not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8523a chance to make a mistake.
8524
8525Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8526say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 8527copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
8528C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8529and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8530fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8531you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8532any conclusion from our observations.
8533
8534@item
ff5dcc92 8535If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
8536diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8537@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 8538If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
8539context, not by line number.
8540
8541The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8542sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8543@end itemize
8544
8545Here are some things that are not necessary:
8546
8547@itemize @bullet
8548@item
8549A description of the envelope of the bug.
8550
8551Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8552which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8553changes will not affect it.
8554
8555This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8556will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8557with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8558We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8559
8560Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8561of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8562output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8563less time, and so on.
8564
8565However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8566report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8567
8568@item
8569A patch for the bug.
8570
8571A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8572the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8573a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8574to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8575
ff5dcc92 8576Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
8577construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8578through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8579able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8580fixed.
8581
8582And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8583patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8584help us to understand.
8585
8586@item
8587A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8588
8589Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8590things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8591@end itemize
8592
8593@node MRI
8594@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8595@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
8596To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8597linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
8598alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8599described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8600simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 8601@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
8602linker commands; these commands are described here.
8603
8604In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8605file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8606features to make use of them.
8607
8608You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8609@samp{-c} command-line option.
8610
8611Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8612command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8613blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 8614MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8615issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8616
8617Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8618
8619You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8620lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8621The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8622
8623@table @code
8624@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8625@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8626@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8627Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
8628the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8629@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8630your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8631script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8632commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8633input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8634@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8635
8636@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8637@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8638Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8639in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8640
8641@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8642
8643@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8644@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8645Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8646@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8647
8648@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8649@item BASE @var{expression}
8650Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8651absolute addresses) in the output file.
8652
8653@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8654@item CHIP @var{expression}
8655@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8656This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8657
8658@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8659@item END
8660This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8661
8662@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8663@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8664Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 8665language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
8666
8667@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 8668@item
252b5132
RH
8669S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8670
8671@item
8672IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8673
8674@item
8675COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8676@samp{COFF}
8677@end enumerate
8678
8679@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8680@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8681Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8682@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8683
8684The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8685same line, with no change in its effect.
8686
8687@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8688@item LOAD @var{filename}
8689@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8690Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8691same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8692command line.
8693
8694@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8695@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8696@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8697MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8698option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8699
8700@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8701@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8702@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8703Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8704order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8705script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8706sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8707file, in the order specified.
8708
8709@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8710@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8711@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8712@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8713Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8714@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8715
8716@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8717@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8718@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8719@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8720You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8721specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8722If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8723@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8724@end table
8725
793c5807
NC
8726@node GNU Free Documentation License
8727@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8728@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8729
370b66a1
CD
8730@node LD Index
8731@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8732
8733@printindex cp
8734
8735@tex
7ca01ed9 8736% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8737% meantime:
8738\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8739\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8740\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8741\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8742\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8743\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8744\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8745\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8746\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8747% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8748@end tex
8749
252b5132 8750@bye
This page took 1.345687 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.